SBS

BSC Database Parameter Description

BR5.0
Version 29.03.2000

made by:
Eckardt Bertermann
SIEMENS AG
ICN CA S W5, TAC3 SBS
Tel.:
+49 89 722 61361
FAX: +49 89 722 28990
e-mail: eckardt.bertermann@icn.siemens.de

SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.0

2 / 142

Eckardt Bertermann, TAC3 SBS

Version 30.03.2000

SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.0

Version 30.03.2000

Important Notes:
This document is not officially released and is designed as quick
reference document for SBS database aspects.
It’s purpose is to describe and explain the BSC database parameters
but not to provide any recommendations for database settings!
NO GUARANTEES FOR CORRECTNESS OF THE CONTENTS !
The author will appreciate any comments for corrections
or suggestions for improvements.

3 / 142

Eckardt Bertermann, TAC3 SBS

.................................. 9 Setting the timing values for BSSMAP control and BSC overload handling: .......................................................................................SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5...................................... 69 Setting the cell specific parameters and threshold values for 14...................................... 92 Setting the status of SMS-CB and Frequency Hopping:............................................ 110 Creating the link for the external connection to the SMS-CB system: .....1 Configuration of Terrestrial Interfaces..................1 CONFIGURATION DIAGRAMS ...................0 Version 30.................................................................................................................... 106 Creating an X25 connection via dedicated link: .... 102 Setting the timer values for CCS7 MTP level 3: ............................................................................................................................................................... 11 Setting the global parameters of the BSC: ....................................................................................... 29 Creating the LPDLM links:................................................................................... 28 Creating the PCM links for the Abis interface: .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 111 Creating a Nailed-Up Connection through the BSC/TRAU:..................... 32 Creating a cell with definition of global parameters: ............................................................1.................................................... 108 Creating the OMC connection: .................... 110 Defining the BSC reference synchronization clock origin:.................................................................................................................. 26 Creating the spare PCM interface boards:...... 6 1....................1...........................................................................03.............................................................................................................................................. 90 Setting the status of Extended Cell Handover: ..................... 87 Creating the SDCCHs for the cell:........................................................................................................................................ 97 Creating the PCMA link:................ 6 1........................................................................................................................................... 24 Creating the Power Supply:................................................................. 86 Creating the BCCH for the cell: ........................................................................................................................................................ 112 Creating a Cell Traffic Recording (CTR) job: ................... 78 Creating the Adjacent Cells:............................................... 115 4 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann........................ 47 Setting the cell specific timer values: .....................................................................................2 BSC DATABASE..................................... TAC3 SBS ....................................................................... 94 Creating the LPDLS links: ............................................2 Configuration of the Radio Interface ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 73 Power Control Parameter Relations ...................................................2000 Contents: 1 DATABASE BR5... 92 Creating the PCMS link:.............4kbit/s data call up................................................................................................. 52 Setting the cell specific parameters and threshold values for voice call Handover:................................................................................................................................................................................................ 9 Setting the BSC control values for periodic measurement data file upload: ................................................................ 98 Setting the uplink and downlink volumes for specific PCMA timeslots: .................................................. 7 1.................................................... 107 Setting the layer 2 and layer 3 OSI parameters for the X25 connection: ............................. 58 Handover Parameter Relations ............................................................... 103 Setting the SCCP timers: ........................................................................ 6 1............. 26 Creating the PCM interface boards: ................................. 79 Creating the LPDLR links: ........................................... 31 Creating the BTS Site Manager:........................... 111 Activating IMSI tracing in the BSC: ............................................................ 83 Creating the TRXs:.................................................................................................. 113 Defining the BSC environmental alarms:................... 95 Creating the TRAU:.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 88 Creating the TCHs for the cell: ............................................................................................................................. 35 Setting the cell attributes for the Interference Measurement of idle TCHs: .................................................................................. 27 Creating the LAPD boards:........................... 24 Setting the alarm priorities of the BSCE objects: ............................................ 100 Creating the CCS7 level 3 addresses of BSC and MSC: ......................................................................... 84 Creating the Frequency Hopping systems: .. 105 Creating the CCS7 link:.......................................................................................... 48 Setting the cell specific optional features: ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 71 Setting the cell specific attributes for Power Control:.......................................................................................................................................................... 97 Basic TRAU-mapping 2: COMPATIBLE_WITH_CROSSCONNECT (no pools created) ....................................................................................... 96 Basic TRAU-mapping 1: NOT_COMPATIBLE_WITH_CROSSCONNECT (no pools created) ................................................................. 107 Creating an X25 connection via A-interface:.............................................0 (MULTIDROP CONFIGURATION) ......................................................................... 16 Setting the alarm priorities of the BSS functional objects: .................................................and downgrading and quality inter-cell handover: ...... 101 Setting the timer values for CCS7 MTP level 2: .........................................................

......5 Inter-cell Handover (power budget).......................................................2 Rules.......................................1........4....HANDOVER AND POWER CONTROL .................03.................. 117 2...........4...............1 2....4.................... 123 2....................0 2 Version 30........................................... 133 2.....2.....................3................ 128 2..1.......................................................................4 HIERARCHICAL CELL STRUCTURE ................................................................................................2 Functional Diagram: Power Control Thresholds: Power Increase / Power Decrease..1 Cell ranking for power budget handovers (non-imperative handover)....................1 HANDOVER THRESHOLDS & ALGORITHMS .................. 121 2...................................... 118 2....................4...2.2........... quality and power budget)................................................................2000 APPENDIX ......................... quality and power budget)......... 131 2........ 129 2....................... 135 3 5 / 142 ALPHABETICAL COMMAND AND PARAMETER INDEX. 125 2......3 HANDOVER IN CONNECTION WITH POWER CONTROL...........1 Functional Diagram Handover Thresholds for Inter-cell Handover and Intra-cell Handover (level........................2.......................1.........2........1 Ranking method 0 .................................................................................... TAC3 SBS .............2..............................................................1... 127 2............... 129 2....1.........................................1.....................................2......................1....................................... Power Control disabled ........................1 Power Increase .2...........................................................1 Functional Diagram: Inter-cell Handover and Intra-cell Handover..2 Intra-cell handover (quality) ................................. quality and distance) and forced handover (directed retry) ..........................2.................................................... 117 2................................................2 Rules: Handover Thresholds for Inter-cell Handover and Intra-cell Handover (level..... 120 2...................................................................................................2.........................................5..1.................1 Speed sensitive handover enabled ............ 137 Eckardt Bertermann...........................................................................2..................... Handover disabled .... 122 2........................................................ Power Increase and Power Decrease ..................... 133 2..............2............. 130 2............2 Power Decrease........................................................2.............. 127 2........................................ 118 2........ 131 2..............3................4......2 Cell ranking for imperative handovers (due to level..................................................................................1 Inter-cell Handover (level)...................................SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. 132 2..................................................................1 Speed sensitive handover enabled............................. 117 2..........................1..2.................................................................................2 Ranking method 1 ............4 Inter-cell handover (distance) ................. 126 Rules: Power Control Thresholds: Power Increase / Power Decrease..........3 Inter-cell handover (quality) ...............................................

1. 4 x PCM30 Timeslot is empty because the corresponding timeslot on the PCMS is used as LPDLS (TRAU matrix type1)... 1 2 3 .SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5..1 Configuration of Terrestrial Interfaces A Interface 31 30 MSC 16 2 1 0 OMAL PCMA CCS7 0-0 0-1 TRAU 0 0-2 0-3 SW/FAW empty empty (TRAU matrix type1). 1 6 / 142 16 . Asub Interface OMAL 16 31 30 TRAU 0 .. TAC3 SBS BTSM-0 BTSM-1 BTS-0 TRX-0-0 TRX-0-1 TRX-0-2 TRX-0-3 BTS-1 TRX-1-0 TRX-1-1 ... Fig.. 2 0 .0 (Multidrop Configuration) 1...0 1 Version 30. 1 x PCM30 submult.2000 Database BR5. . A SW/FAW TCH á 16 kbit/s 1 x PCM30 submult... 10 .. 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 3 0 1 2 3 2 1 0 . LPDLS-0 CCS7 1 0 0 1 2 3 BSC PCMS-0 DTLP-1 port 1 simpl...1 Configuration Diagrams 1. PCMB-0 1 2 3 TRX TRX TRX 0-2 0-1 0-0 SW/FAW LPDLM-0 LPDLR-0-0 LPDLR-0-1 LPDLR-0-2 LPDLR-0-3 Terrestrial Interfaces Configuration Eckardt Bertermann. A ..03. Abis Interface empty BSC 31 30 DTLP-0 port 0 simpl. LPDLM-1 LPDLR-1-0 LPDLR-1-1 0 ..

03.0 1.2 Version 30.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. 3 Radio Interfaces Configuration BTS-1 TCH/D = dual rate TCH 7 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann. 2 Radio Interface Configuration BTS-0 BTSM-1 ts 0 ts1 ts 2 ts 3 ts 4 ts 5 ts 6 ts 7 TRX 0: ARFCN 71 BCBCH SDCCH TCH/D TCH/D TCH/D TCH/D TCH/D TCH/D TRX 1: ARFCN 62 TCH/D TCH/D TCH/D TCH/D TCH/D TCH/D TCH/D TCH/D Fig.2000 Configuration of the Radio Interface BTSM-0 ts 0 ts1 ts 2 ts 3 ts 4 ts 5 ts 6 ts 7 TRX 0: ARFCN 10 BCCH SCBCH TCH/D TCH/D TCH/D TCH/D TCH/D TCH/D TRX 1: ARFCN 60 TCH/D TCH/D TCH/D TCH/D TCH/D TCH/D TCH/D TCH/D TRX 2: ARFCN 80 TCH/D TCH/D TCH/D TCH/D TCH/D TCH/D TCH/D TCH/D TRX 3: ARFCN 110 TCH/D TCH/D TCH/D TCH/D TCH/D TCH/D TCH/D TCH/D Fig.1. TAC3 SBS .

5). Changes of parameter names are UNDERLINED. this type of frame are new in BR5.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. 8 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann.0 3) Changes of parameter values.03.2000 Notes: 1) The commands of this example database are presented in the same order as they would be generated by DBAEM when generating an ASCII database from a database in binary format. TAC3 SBS . value ranges and default values are indicated by highlighted letters. 2) The parameters marked by (compared to BR4.0 Version 30.

defines the start time for measurement data file upload. defines the time period between two uploads of measurement data files.LOG and uploaded to the OMC. Object name. The parameter IMSIFSIZ specifies the maximum allowed size of this binary trace file. this parameter is associated to the feature 'IMSI Tracing' (see command CREATE TRACE) and specifies the maximum file size for the IMSI trace files in the BSC directory. Setting this parameter to UPPE_0h disables the periodic upload.TMP: when the entered size is reached for the file SCAN. reassembled and converted to ASCII. In the OMC. range: default: UPPE_0h = Per. period 24h UPPE_0h MASCLOGFS=3.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. MEDAFUST=0-0.2 Version 30.LOG is automatically uploaded to the OMC. When the tracing process is finished the binary trace files are closed and compressed to the BSC directory COMPR_DIR from where they are uploaded to the OMC at the next possible point of time.TMP is closed. renamed to SCAN. range: default: upload start hour upload start minute upload start hour upload start minute 0-23 0-59 0 0 MEDAFUPE=UPPE_0H.TMP the SCAN. unit: range: default: 9 / 142 1 Mbyte 0-30 30 Measurement data file upload period. period 12h UPPE_24h= Upl.TMP file. New measurement results are then written to a newly opened SCAN. Measurement data file upload start. unit: range: default: 1 Mbyte 1-6 3 IMSIFSIZ=30. disabled UPPE_1h = Upload period 1h UPPE_2h = Upload period 2h UPPE_3h = Upload period 3h UPPE_4h = Upload period 4h UPPE_6h = Upload period 6h UPPE_8h = Upload period 8h UPPE_12h= Upl. When an IMSI tracing procedure is in progress. The file SCAN.upload start minute. TAC3 SBS .TMP is the scanner logfile on the BSC disk to which all scanner results of scanners which were created ‘BYFILE’ are written. Upl. The size threshold entered by MASCLOGFS determines the maximum allowed size of the file SCAN. To upload the scanner results to the OMC the file SCAN. the BSC writes the binary trace data to the open binary trace file in the BSC directory TRACE_IMSI. Parameter format: upload start hour . the binary file is also closed and compressed to the directory COMPR_DIR for upload and a new binary trace file is opened.0 1. When the maximum size has been reached although the traced call is still in progress. the uploaded files are decompressed. Maximum scanner logfile size. IMSI file size.2000 BSC Database Setting the BSC control values for periodic measurement data file upload: SET BSC PKGBSCC: NAME=BSC:0. this attribute indicates the maximum size of the scanner result file on the BSC disk.03. Eckardt Bertermann.

In this case a new open binary file is generated which records the next events of the call to be traced. the uploaded files are decompressed. When the trace logfile exceeds the size specified by CFS. A CTR logfile can also be closed and prepared for upload if the trace is still in progress. In the OMC. this attribute indicates the maximum size of the ‘Cell Traffic Recording’ logfile on the BSC disk.2000 CTR file size. When a CTR tracing procedure is in progress. The parameter CFS specifies the size of this CTR logfile. The feature ‘Cell Traffic Recording’ or ‘Cell Trace’ (CTR) is a feature used to record cell specific call events for monitoring purposes in a similar way like IMSI tracing (for details please see the descriptions provided for the command CREATE CTRSCHED). unit: range: default: 10 / 142 1 Mbyte 1-6 1 Version 30.The parameter CFS specifies the maximum file size for the CTR trace logfiles in the BSC directory. a trace record is generated an written to the CTR trace logfile. Eckardt Bertermann.03. On call termination.0 CFS=3. it is closed and compressed to the BSC directory UPL_READY from where it is uploaded to the OMC at the next possible point of time (automatic upload takes place every 5 minutes). reassembled and converted to ASCII for analysis. TAC3 SBS . the BSC writes the binary trace data to the open binary trace file in the BSC directory TRACE_CTR.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.

Rule: BSCT4 (BSC) > T2 (MSC) The value of T4 must be higher than the value of the MSC timer T2 plus the transmission time of the Reset and the Reset Acknowledge messages (It is recommended to set the MSC-timer T2 to ca. the MSC marks the affected timeslots as ’unavailable’. HLFSEC=0.5s SEC5=5s 0-254 HLFSEC-12 GSM 08. Object path name. The timer watches over the reception of a RESET ACKNOWLEDGE message from the MSC in reaction to a transmitted RESET message. TAC3 SBS .0 Version 30.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. 10s). this timer determines the time to receive the BLOCKING ACKNOWLEDGE message.. The BSC informs the MSC about not usable A-timeslots by using a BLOCKING/UNBLOCKING message. this timer determines the frequency of RESOURCE INDICATION message sending. unit: range: default: Reference: 11 / 142 BSC timer T3. The timer T1 watches over the reception of the BLOCKING/ UNBLOCKING ACKNOWLEDGE message from the MSC.08 BSCT3=HLFSEC-50. BSC timer T1.5s SEC5=5s 0-254 HLFSEC-60 GSM 08. The MSC selects the terrestrial resources (A interface traffic channels) to be used for a call.2000 Setting the timing values for BSSMAP control and BSC overload handling: SET BSC PKGBSCT: NAME=BSC:0. Eckardt Bertermann. As a result.5s SEC5=5s 0-254 HLFSEC-50 GSM 08. The value must be higher than the MSC maximum reaction time and the transmission time for the blocking/unblocking and the associated acknowledge message. LPDLS or SS7L etc. BSCT1=HLFSEC-12. The MSC therefore needs to be informed about any A-interface circuits that are out of service in the BSC or cannot be used due to configuration of OMAL. unit: range: default: Reference: HLFSEC=0.08 BSCT4=HLFSEC-60.03. After a first T1 expiration the BSS repeats the BLOCKING/UNBLOCKING message After a second expiration the BSS marks the associated circuits as blocked without waiting for the acknowledge. this timer determines the time to return a RESET ACKNOWLEDGE message. unit: range: default: Reference: HLFSEC=0.08 BSC timer T4.

The value must be bigger than the sum of the time for all messages to be sent to the MS plus the time to access a target and come back (if necessary). Only after T7 expiry the reception of a new HO_COND_IND from the BTS leads to the sending of an updated HO_RQD towards the MSC.5s SEC5=5s 0-254 HLFSEC-4 GSM 08. New HO_COND_INDs received while T7 is still running for a previous HO attempt are discarded. T8 is defined as the time that BSC layer 3 will wait for a handover to complete before releasing the source channel.no furher HO_COND_INDs received from the BTS .08 Version 30.08 BSC timer T8.0 BSCT7=HLFSEC-12. this timer determines the time to receive the HANDOVER COMPLETE message. BSCT8=HLFSEC-10. T7 purpose: start: stop: minimum time to pass between two HANDOVER REQUIRED messages sending of HANDOVER REQUIRED by the BSC . Note: Due to the SBS implementation T8 replaces the function of T3103 (see SET BTS PKGBTST). the BSS sends a HANDOVER REQUIRED message to the MSC and starts T7.reception of a HANDOVER COMMAND from the MSC .2000 BSC timer T7. TAC3 SBS . Rule: BSCT8 < TSYNC and BSCT8 < TTRAU (for TSYNC and TTRAU see command SET BTS PKGBTST) This setting is necessary to ensure that a signaling failure (T8 and T10) is detected before transcoder failure (TSYNC and TTRAU) 12 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann. sending of a HANDOVER COMMAND by the BSC start: reception of a CLEAR COMMAND from the MSC or HANDOVER stop: FAILURE from the MS expiry action: Sending of a CLEAR REQUEST to the MSC with cause ’radio interface message failure’ followed by release of the call resources (CLEAR CMD received from MSC).5s SEC5=5s 0-254 HLFSEC-10 GSM 08. If the BTSE has sent a HANDOVER CONDITION INDICATION message and the handover is to be executed by the MSC or if the MSC has initiated a HANDOVER CANDIDATE ENQUIRY procedure.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.communication to MS is lost . call cleared expiry action: new HO_RQD is sent if HO_COND_IND is received from the BTS This timer should be set with respect to the timer value THORQST (see command SET HAND) and the SIEMENS MSC internal timer T_HO_REJ: Recommendation: THORQST (HAND) > BSCT7 (BSC) > T_HO_REJ (MSC) T_HO_REJ is an MSC timer which supervises the HO transaction MSC internally and is hardcoded to 5s.08 GSM 05. T8 purpose: keep the old channels available for a sufficient time in order to allow the MS to return to the old channel return to it if the handover is not successful and to release the old channel if the MS is lost. unit: range: default: Reference: HLFSEC=0. this timer determines the minimum time to pass between two HANDOVER REQUIRED messages.transaction has ended. unit: range: default: Reference: HLFSEC=0.03. Basically T7 determines the waiting time for the reception of a HANDOVER COMMAND from the MSC.

5s SEC5=5s 0-254 HLFSEC-16 GSM 08.0 BSC database.0 it is actually used for the first time as the queuing feature is available from BR5. T11 purpose: start: stop: Limitation of the queuing time for an TCH request due to Assignment sending of the QUEUING INDICATION (BSC->MSC) .SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.e.e. TAC3 SBS . b) Intra-cell handover: Sending of a CLEAR REQUEST to the MSC with cause ’radio interface message failure’ followed by release of the call resources resources (CLEAR CMD received from MSC). This parameter is only relevant if the feature ‘queuing’ is enabled (see parameter EQ in command SET BTS PKGBTSO). a) & b): sending of an ASSIGNMENT COMMAND by the BSC start: a) & b): reception of an ASSIGNMENT COMPLETE or an ASSIGNMENT stop: FAILURE from the MS expiry action: a) Assignment procedure: Sending of an ASSIGNMENT FAILURE to the MSC with cause ’radio interface message failure’ followed by release of the call resources.discarding of the TCH request from the TCH queue (all cases except T11 expiry) expiry action: Sending of a CLEAR REQUEST to the MSC with cause ’no radio resource available’ followed by release of the call resources. Rule: BSCT10 < TSYNC and BSCT10 < TTRAU (for TSYNC and TTRAU see command SET BTS PKGBTST) This setting is necessary to ensure that a signaling failure (T8 and T10) is detected before transcoder failure (TSYNC and TTRAU) BSCT11=HLFSEC-16. If the TCH request for assignment procedure cannot be served within this time frame and T11 expires. Note: Due to the SBS implementation T10 replaces the function of the GSM timer T3107.0 on. but in BR5. When a TCH request for an assignment procedure (i. BSC timer T11. T10 purpose: a) Assignment procedure: release of the associated resources if the MS is lost during the assignment procedure. The value must be higher than the maximum transmission time of the ASSIGNMENT COMMAND and the ASSIGNMENT COMPLETE message plus the maximum duration of an attempt to establish a data link multiframe mode.successful allocation of a TCH to the queued TCH request .08 This timer is not new in the BR5. unit: range: default: Reference: HLFSEC=0.08) Version 30. unit: range: default: Reference: HLFSEC=0. when the BSC receives an ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message from the MSC) is put into a queue due to TCH congestion. T11 determines the maximum time the TCH request may remain in the queue to wait for a busy TCH to become idle.08 (04.2000 BSC timer T10. This timer is started on the sending of an ASSIGNMENT COMMAND message and is normally stopped when the MS has correctly seized the new channels. T3107 is not used by the SBS.5s SEC5=5s 0-254 HLFSEC-10 GSM 08. i.0 BSCT10=HLFSEC-10. b) Intra-cell handover: keep the old channels available for a sufficient time in order to allow the MS to return to the old channel return to it if the handover is not successful and to release the old channel if the MS is lost during the handover procedure.03. 13 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann. the BSC sends a CLEAR REQUEST to the MSC and the context is released. this timer determines the maximum allowed queuing time. this timer determines the time to return the ASSIGNMENT COMPLETE message in case of call setup and intra-cell handover.

08 BSCT20=HLFSEC-12. 10s (see parameter BSCT4).2000 BSC timer T20. Rules: T16 (MSC) > BSCT13 (BSC) The value of the "Wait for Acknowledge timer" T16 in the MSC must be higher than the value of T13 plus the transmission time of the RESET and the RESET ACKNOWLEDGE message (it is recommended to set the MSC-timer T16 to 35s).e. unit: range: default: Reference: HLFSEC=0.08 BSCT18=HLFSEC-60. the load is increased step by step: on the first load increase T17 and T18 are restarted. unit: range: default: Reference: HLFSEC=0.03.5s SEC5=5s 0-254 HLFSEC-50 GSM 08. After expiration of T13 the BSS sends a RESET ACKNOWLEDGE message to the MSC.0 BSCT13=HLFSEC-50. When getting informed about an overload situation (in the BTS. BSC timer T18. The timer T13 is a guard timer which is started after the reception of a RESET message. This procedure is continued until full load capability is finally reached.08 BSCT19=HLFSEC-12. HLFSEC=0.e. unit: range: default: Reference: range: default: Reference: 14 / 142 BSC timer T13. BSC timer T17.5s SEC5=5s 0-254 HLFSEC-12 GSM 08. On every expiry of T18 (i. If the overload situation still exists after expiry of T17 but before expiry of T18 the next step of traffic reduction is initated and both timers (T17 and T18) are started again. The value of T13 must be higher than the time needed by the BSS to release all affected calls and to erase all affected references. If T18 exspires. BSC timer T19. TAC3 SBS . unit: Version 30.5s SEC5=5s 0-254 HLFSEC-20 GSM 08. this timer represents the overload message block timer. unit: range: default: Reference: HLFSEC=0.5s SEC5=5s 0-254 HLFSEC-12 GSM 08. HLFSEC=0. i. As long as T17 runs all overload messages with the same cause as the initial message are ignored in order not to reduce the traffic load too rapidly. This procedure is repeated as long as the overload conditions are still fulfilled after each expiry of T17. if the overload condition is no longer detected.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.5s SEC5=5s 0-254 HLFSEC-60 GSM 08.08 BSCT17=HLFSEC-20.08 Eckardt Bertermann. this timer determines the time to receive RESET CIRCUIT ACKNOWLEDGE at the BSC. this timer represents the overload observation timer. this timer determines the time to receive CIRCUIT GROUP BLOCKING ACKNOWLEDGE. the MSC or the BSC itself) the BSC performs the first step for traffic reduction and starts the two timers T17 and T18. It is recommended to set both T13 in the BSC and T2 in the MSC to ca. It provides the time for the BSS to release all affected calls and to erase all affected references. Continuation see BSCT18. no overload messages detected after expiry of T17) the next step of load increase is initated. this timer determines the RESET guard period at the BSS.

Version 30.2000 BSC timer for queuing of handover. unit: range: default: Reference: HLFSEC=0.0 BSCTQHO=HLFSEC-120. the MSC will attempt another HO REQUEST procedure towards the next target BTS. TAC3 SBS .5s SEC5=5s 0-254 HLFSEC-120 GSM 08. TQHO purpose: Limitation of the queuing time for an TCH request due to incoming MSC-controlled handover sending of the QUEUING INDICATION (BSC->MSC) start: . TQHO determines the maximum time the TCH request may remain in the queue to wait for a busy TCH to become idle. As a result. 15 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann. If the TCH request for the incoming handovert cannot be served within this time frame and TQHO expires in case of incoming MSC-controlled HO.successful allocation of a TCH to the queued TCH request stop: . this timer determines the maximum allowed queuing time for incoming handover.08 This timer is not new in the BR5.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.0 BSC database.0 it is actually used for the first time as the queuing feature is available from BR5. When a TCH request for an incoming MSC-controlled handover (i. when the BSC receives a HANDOVER REQUEST message from the MSC) is put into a queue due to TCH congestion.03.discarding of the TCH request from the TCH queue (all cases except TQHO expiry) expiry action: Sending of a HANDOVER FAILURE with cause ’no radio resource available’ to the MSC followed by release of the call resources.e. if there is another target cell available for the handover procedure. but in BR5. This parameter is only relevant if the feature ‘queuing’ is enabled (see parameter EQ in command SET BTS PKGBTSO).0 on. the TCH request is rejected with a HANDOVER FAILURE.

SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.0

Version 30.03.2000

Setting the global parameters of the BSC:
SET BSC PKGBSCB:
NAME=BSC:0,

Object path name.

NETWTYPE=GSMDCS,

Network type, determines the type of network respectively
frequency band.

range:
default:

GSMDCS, GSMPCS,
GSMR, PCS1900
GSMDCS

New value in BR5.0!

T3122=5,
unit:
range:
default:
Reference:

1s
0-255
5
GSM 04.08

ERRACT=NOFILTERNOFILTER-NOFILTERNOFILTER-NOFILTER,
range:

default:

CRITICAL
MAJOR
MINOR
WARNING
NOFILTER
FERMAINT
NOFILTER

ENCALSUP=NOENCR&
GSMV1&GSMV2,

default:

encalg1=NOENCR
encalg2=GSMV1
encalg3..10=NOCONFIG

MAXNCELL=16,
unit:
range:
default:

1
1-16
1

MSCVER=PHASE2,
range:

default:

16 / 142

PHASE1
PHASE2
PHASE2CC
PHASE2EFR
PHASE2CCEFR
PHASE1

Wait indication time, defines the MS waiting time before the MS
attempts another channel request after IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT
REJECT. This timer value is sent to the MS in the IE ‘Wait Indication’
within the IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT REJECT message.
Error reactions, this parameter determines the output filters for
different alarm event types. The five entered subattributes represent
alarm messages in the alarm event types CommunicationQualityOfService-Processing-Equipment-Environment. When
ERRACT is set to one alarm priority for a specifiv alarm event type all
alarms of lower and equal priority are ignored for this event type.
Note: The value FERMAINT can be used only for Processing Failure
Events. Setting the PROC field to FERMAINT enables the output of
certain call processing alarm messages which are normally
suppressed (e.g. AP_ERROR_INDICATION etc.) in order to allow a
closer look on the grade of service in the cell for maintenance
purposes. Thus FERMAINT works as a ’negative’ filter:
Supported encryption algorithms, this parameter determines the
algorithms for the radio interface ciphering supportede by the BSC.
NOENCR means ‘no ciphering’,
GSMV1 represents the ciphering algorithm A5/1,
GSMV2 represents the ciphering algorithm A5/2.

Maximum number of target cells, this parameter indicates how
many target cells may be included in the HANDOVER REQUIRED
message sent to the MSC. The HO_RQD message is sent, if the HO
target does not belong to the own BSC area or if all handovers for a
certain cell are to be performed by the MSC (see parameters
LOTERCH and LOTRACH (SET HAND)).
MSC version, this parameter determines the protocol type to be
used on the A-interface. This parameter has to be set in
correspondance with the GSM phase resp. the supported A-interface
protocol variants of the connected MSC. PHASE2CC indicates that
MSC the supports the Information Element ‘Current Channel’ (‘CC’ in
the value of MSCVER actually means that the BSC includes the IE
‘Current Channel’ in the HANDOVER REQUIRED message, the
reception of this IE from the MSC is correctly handled anyway),
PHASE2EFR indicates an MSC that supports the ‘Speech Version’
IEs, PHASE2CCEFR indicates that the MSC supports both the IE
‘Current Channel’ and the ‘Speech Version’ IEs.

Eckardt Bertermann, TAC3 SBS

SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.0

OVLSTTHR=9500,
unit:
range:
default:

1000=10%
7000-10000
9500

OVLENTHR=8500,
unit:
range:
default:

1000=10%
7000-10000
8500

BSCOVLH=TRUE,
range:
default:

TRUE, FALSE
TRUE

BTSOVLH=TRUE,
range:
default:

17 / 142

TRUE, FALSE
TRUE

Version 30.03.2000

BSC overload start threshold, this parameter determines the
TDPC load threshold for the start of overload handling. The TDPC
load is specified in %, where the value 1000 corresponds to 10%
(see also parameters OVLENTHR and BSCOVLH).
BSC overload end threshold, this parameter determines the TDPC
load threshold for the end of overload handling. The TDPC load is
specified in %, where the value 1000 corresponds to 10% (see also
parameters OVLSTTHR and BSCOVLH).
BSC overload handling, determines whether BSC overload
handling is enabled or not.
BSC overload is detected when
- the Tx buffers of the CCS7 links are congested,
- the percentage of busy level 3 radio registers to handle incoming
call requests is above a threshold (90%),
- the real time processor load of the telephony processor TDPC is
above a threshold set by the parameter OVLSTTHR. The overload
handling is stopped when the load is below the threshold set by the
parameter OVLENTHR,
- a lack of TDPC memory resources is detected.
BSC overload handling comprises the following steps for traffic
reduction (if no success on first steps → escalation):
1. step: the BSC barrs the first half of access classes in 2 cells
2. step: the BSC barrs all access classes in 2 cells
3. step: BSC performs step 1 and step 2 for the next 2 cells
4. step: ....(and so on - until the overload situation disappears)
Within the traffic reduction algorithm, a round robin mechanism is
used. This means that on repeated detection of a BSC overload
situations the BSC will not barr the same cells again but select others
for new barring procedures. The overload regulation algorithm is
based on the timers T17 and T18 (see parameters BSCT17 and
BSCT18 in command SET PKGBSCT).
BTS overload handling, determines whether BTS overload handling
is enabled or not. Enable BTS Overload Handover ; allows a
managing system to enable or disable the BTS overload handling by
BSC. BTS overload handling is detected on:
a) AGCH overload (i.e. BS is not able to forward immediate
assignment or immediate assignment reject message)
BSC defense actions (if no success on first steps → escalation):
1. pagings for the concerned BTS are discarded
2. the BSC barrs the first half of access classes (0..5) in the cell
3. the BSC barrs all other access classes (6..9) in the cell
(Emergency Calls are not affected).
b) PCH overload: PCH overload is detected when used paging buffer
space in the BTS for paging messages is exceeds a threshold (see
parameter TCCCHLDI in PKGBTSB).
BSC defense actions:
1. pagings for the concerned BTS are discarded
2. an OVERLOAD message with cause ’CCCH overload’ and cell
identity of the affected cell is sent to the MSC. Moreover, the BTS
periodically informs the BSC (see parameter PCCCHLDI in
PKGBTSB) about the current load on the PCH.
c) RACH Overload: RACH overload is detected when the percentage
of busy RACHs exceeds a threshold (see parameter TCCCHLDI in
PKGBTSB). The BTS sends a CCCH load indication message to the
BSC (see parameter PCCCHLDI in PKGBTSB). No special defense
actions are applied.
Eckardt Bertermann, TAC3 SBS

SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.0

MSCOVLH=TRUE,
range:
default:

TRUE, FALSE
TRUE

EISDCCHHO=ENABLE,
range:
default:

ENABLE, DISABLE
ENABLE

ENFORCHO=ENABLE,
range:
default:

18 / 142

ENABLE, DISABLE
ENABLE

Version 30.03.2000

MSC overload handling, determines whether MSC overload
handling is enabled or not. MSC overload is detected by the MSC
itself. The BSC is informed by an overload indication message with
cause „ processor overload“ . The MSC reduces paging load by its
own and therefore the BSC reduces only mobile originating traffic by
means of barring access classes (in the same way as for BSC
overload).
Inter SDCCH handover enabled, determines whether ‘Inter BSC
SDCCH handover’ is enabled. ‘Inter BSC SDCCH handover’ is used
for Directed Retry (see param. ENFORCHO) or an SDCCH-SDCCHHandover (see param. ESDCCHHO) to a neighbour cell which
belongs to a different BSC. In this case the handover process is
controlled by the MSC. Setting this parameter to ‘disabled’ has the
following results: a) the BSC is prevented from sendig ‘handover
required (HORQD)’ messages for ongoing SDCCH connections to
the MSC and b) the BSC drops all target cells (received in the HCI)
that do not belong to the own area.
Note: If a Siemens MSC is used EISDCCHHO should be set to
‘disabled’ since this kind of handover is not supported before SR7.0.
Forced handover enabled, this parameter determines whether the
BSC may send a FORCED HANDOVER REQUEST message for
running SDCCH connections to the BTS. This message is used for
either for ‘Directed Retry’ or for the procedure ‘Forced handover due
to Preemption’ (see parameter EPRE in command SET BTS
PKGBTSO). A ‘Directed Retry’ procedure is performed if a MS
attempts a MOC in a cell in which no idle TCH is available, e.g. due
to congestion. A successful ‘Directed Retry’ results in the assignment
of a TCH in the best adjacent cell. During this procedure the BSC,
having received the ASSREQ from the MSC, sends the ‘forced
handover request’ message to the BTS, which in turn sends
HANDOVER CONDITION INDICATION messages with the cause
‘forced’. The HCI messages contain a list of target cells that the BTS
has determined by evaluating the measurement reports sent uplink
by the MS during the SDCCH phase. (-> see also command SET
ADJC., parameters FHORLMO and TIMERFHO).
In case of ‘Forced handover due to Preemption’, the BSC sends the
FORCED HO REQ to the BTS for the call which is to be preempted.
For the BTS, the process of the target cell list generation and the
target cell ranking is exactly the same like for a directed retry – in
both cases the forced handover offset (FHORLMO) is applied.
However, the resulting signalling transaction rather corresponds to
that of a normal handover procedure (with the appropriate cause
values) than that of a directed retry.
Notes:
- Setting this parameter to ‘enable’ only activates the Directed Retry
controlled by the BSC, i.e. the origin and the target cell belong to the
same BSC.
- In hierarchical cell structures the ranking of the target cells in the
HCI sent as a result of the ‘forced handover request’ is performed
according to the setting of the parameter HIERF (see SET HAND).
- If the feature ‘Preemption’ is enabled, the forced handover is only
attempted, if ENFORCHO is set to ENABLE. If this is not the case
the preempted call is immediately released !

Eckardt Bertermann, TAC3 SBS

DISABLE 1-100 ENABLE-30 (minor) ENABLE-60 (major) ENABLE-90 (critical) ASMONTH=ENABLE-30ENABLE-60-ENABLE-90.03. range: default: ENABLE. This parameter has an influence on the allowed value range for the high CIC number (see parameter HCICN (CREATE PCMA)).7 this flag is permanently set to ‘disabled’ and cannot be administered! NTWSN64. this parameter determines whether Handover from SDCCH to SDCCH is enabled or disabled. range: default: TRUE. PCM30. PCM24 PCM30 EFRSUPP=FALSE. range: default: default: ENABLE. specifies the maximum number of timeslots available for each PCM line. specifies the used speech coding law. this parameter specifies the format of the circuit identification code (CIC). If this parameter is set to ‘enable’ the BTS is allowed to send HANDOVER CONDITION INDICATION messages because of radio reasons to the BSC during the SDCCH phase. NOTSTRUCT GSM Enhanced full rate supported. range: default: SDCCH handover enabled.2000 GSM. Note: In BR3. Speech encoding law. determines the state and the threshold values for the minor. range: default: Network card type.0 ESDCCHHO=DISABLE. range: Version 30. The threshold values can only be assigned if the previous attribute is set to ENABLE. range: default: 19 / 142 A-interface TCH monitoring thresholds. The threshold values can only be assigned if the previous attribute is set to ENABLE. major and critical QOS alarms for the signaling channels on the A-interface. determines the state and the threshold values for the minor. determines whether a switching network SN64 or SN16 is used. A-interface signaling monitoring thresholds. CIC format. Read-only parameter! range: DISABLE NTWCARD=NTWSN16.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. FALSE FALSE CICFM=GSM. determines whether the enhanced full rate speech algorithm is allowed in the TRAUs controlled by the BSC. NTWSN16 NTWSN64 AMONTH=ENABLE-30ENABLE-60-ENABLE-90. DISABLE 1-100 ENABLE-30 (minor) ENABLE-60 (major) ENABLE-90 (critical) SPENLAW=A_LAW. Eckardt Bertermann. major and critical QOS alarms for the traffic channels on the A-interface. PCM type. A_LAW M_LAW A_LAW PCMTYPE=PCM30. TAC3 SBS .

SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. FALSE FALSE HRSPEECH=FALSE. Only the basic mapping principle can be selected initially (see command CREATE TRAU. ‘TSLA pooling’ must be activated if HSCSD (see parameter ENHSCSD) is used on this BSC. this parameter indicates whether the ‘TSLA pooling’ feature is activated on the BSC side (‘enabling flag’) and the pool type to be used as default. the pooling types that include the support of more advanced features must be assigned to TRAU shelves equipped with the appropriate TRAC versions (Mixing of TRAC versions within one TRAU shelf is not allowed!). MSC pooling.g. POOL_5. FALSE initial pooling type: POOL_NOTDEF POOL_1. POOL_2. As the MSC is the one to select the A-interface channels for a specific call the MSC has to manage the pooling types assigned to the A interface resources. POOL_6 POOL_7. FALSE FALSE Version 30. POOL_20 FALSE MSCPOOL=FALSE. Half rate speech. Thus it is possible to assign different speech and data coding types to different TRAU shelves. The status of this flag determines whether the BSC allows the assignment of an HR TCH if the ASS REQ contains a corresponding ‘preferred channel type’. Thus the BSC can seperatly manage the available resources e. i.03.0 ENPOOL=FALSE. The ‘initial pooling type’ is automatically assigned to all existing TSLAs when the enabling-flag modifies the pooling state to TRUE. this parameter specifies whether the connected MSC is able to manage the ‘pooling’ feature or not. for ordinary speech calls and for high speed data connections. POOL_15. The different values for the pooling type are predefined and represent a certain combination of different ‘supported coding types’ for speech and data (see table at command CREATE PCMA and SET TSLA). Attention: Pooling also affects the mapping of timeslots between the A. Eckardt Bertermann. It can. range: default: 20 / 142 TRUE.and Asub-! A TCH pool for multislot connections must map all Asub-timeslots used for a HSCSD-call to a single A-interface timeslot! Thus the previously rigid mapping pattern of A.0) is now replaced by a semipermanent mapping pattern. TAC3 SBS . however. too. when the pooling feature is activated. If the pooling feature is enabled the available A-interface timeslots are classified by a ‘pooling type’.e. Moreover.and Asubtimeslots (represented by the parameter TRANMTX which was valid up to BR4.2000 Enable pooling. parameter ALLCRIT). the pooling type must be adapted to the version and capabilities of the used TRAC-HW in the TRAU. which depends on the number and type of pools configured. be modified seperately for the PCMA and TSLA objects (see CREATE/SET PCMA:DEFPOOLTYP and SET TSLA:POOLTYP). format: range: default: <enabling flag> <initial pooling type> enabling flag: TRUE. range: default: TRUE. POOL_3 POOL_4. this parameter specifies whether the feature ‘Half Rate Speech’ is enabled for the BSC or not.

To activate it. but it may alter the number of TCHs used by the connection (in this case the data rate per TCH changes). handover and/or the maintenance of the service quality. Eckardt Bertermann. In symmetric mode all secondary TCHs are bi-directional (UL and DL) and in asymmetric mode only uni-directional (DL) secondary TCHs are provided. however. Connection modes: There are 2 types of multislot connections: symmetric and asymmetric ones.. Each HSCSD connection consists of 1 main TCH which carries the main signalling (both FACCH and SACCH) and further 1. All TCHs used in an HSCSD connection are handovered simultaneously.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.03. The BSC may alter the number of timeslots used for the connection and the channel codings when handing the connection over to the new channels.0 ENHSCSD=FALSE. In both symmetric and asymmetric HSCSD configuration the neighbour cell measurements are reported on each uplink channel used. The change of the air resource allocation is done by the BSC using ‘service level upgrading and downgrading' procedures. All kinds of handovers are supported. TAC3 SBS . The data rate depends on the bearer capability requested by the MS and the negotiation result between MS and MSC.4 (= 4 x 9. Reasons for the change of the resource allocation may be either the lack of radio resources. FALSE FALSE Version 30. 2) As a precondition for HSCSD the feature ‘early classmark sending’ (see SET BTS PKGBTSO:ENAECLA) must be enabled! Principle: HSCSD is a feature which allows the ‘bunching’ of up to 4 consecutive radio timeslots for data connections of up to 38. All radio timeslots used for one connection are FR timeslots located on the same TRX and use the same frequency hopping mode and the same TSC. For transparent HSCSD connections the BSC is not allowed to change the user data rate. this parameter specifies whether the feature ‘High Speed Crcuit Switched Data (HSCSD)’ is enabled for the BSC or not.6) kbit/s (multislot connections). Handover: In symmetric mode individual signal level and quality reporting for each used channel is applied. For non-transparent calls the BSC is also allowed to downgrade the user rate to a lower value.3 secondary TCHs. The quality measurements reported on the main channel are based on the worst quality measured on the main and the unidirectional downlink timeslots used. It may alter the number of TCH/F as well as the channel codings used for the connection.2000 Enable HSCSD. The asymmetric mode is only possible for non-transparent data connections. For an asymmetric HSCSD configuration individual signal level and quality reporting is used for the main TCH. The downlink based asymmetry allows the use of a receive rate higher than the transmission rate and is thus very typical for Internet applications. range: default: 21 / 142 TRUE. Resource allocation: The BSC is responsible for the flexible air resource allocation. it must be explicitely enabled for each BTS (see CREATE BTS PKGBTSB: BTSHSCSD). Notes: 1) This parameter enables HSCSD for the BSC base only.

0 ENFOIAHO=FALSE. range: default: 22 / 142 NONSYNC. If there are not enough adjacent radio TCHs available when an HSCSD call is requested a ‘forced intracell handover’ is performed which reorders the current timeslot seizure in such a way that a sufficient number of adjacent timeslots is available for an incoming HSCSD call. When the PHYS INFO is received the MS stops T3124 and establishes the layer-2 connection on the new FACCH by sending the SABM. In the HANDOVER COMMAND the BSC sets the ‘Synchronization Indication’ IE to the value ‘non-synchronized’.5 the forced intracell HO is not supported for incoming HSCSD handovers. this parameter specifies whether the handover is ‘synchronized’ or ‘non-synchronized’. range: default: TRUE. Synchronized handover is possible between cells belonging to the same site (intercell handover from one sector to the neighbour sector). The MS falls back to the old TCH when T3124 expires or when the layer-2 connection setup fails. In BR4. No PHYS INFO is sent to the MS. The HANDOVER COMMAND sent by the BSC then contains the ‘Synchronization Indication: synchronized’ and the current timing advance value. it transmits 4 consecutive HO_ACCESS messages and immediately establishes the layer-2 connection on the new FACCH by sending the SABM after that. This HO is executed by the BSC by just sending the necessary ASS CMDs without having received a HCI from the BTS. The synchronous handover is faster than the asynchromous one. Therefore it should be applied where possible as it speeds up the handover procedure and thus reduces the ‘speech gap’ that can occur during the handover procedure. TAC3 SBS . FALSE FALSE FIXTEI HOSYNC=NOSYNC.03. When the MS accesses the target cell after receipt of the HO CMD. When the MS accesses the target cell after receipt of the HO CMD. Handover synchronicity. Canceled in BR5.2000 Enable forced intra-cell HO. Synchronous handover: In case of synchronous HO the BSC activates the TCH in the target cell by a CHANNEL ACTIVATION message with the IE ‘activation type: related to synchronous handover’. This message contains the actual timing advance value which the new BTS derives from the delay of the HO_ACCESS messages received from the MS. The difference between the both handover procedure is the follwing: Asynchronous handover: In case of (normal) asynchronous HO the BSC activates the TCH in the target cell by a CHANNEL ACTIVATION message with the IE ‘activation type: related to asynchronous handover’. A fallback to the to the old THC is only possible if the MS fails to set up the layer-2 connection. Eckardt Bertermann. SYNC NONSYNC Version 30. it starts the timer T3124 on transmission of the first HO_ACCESS message and repeats the transmission until it recieves the PHYSICAL INFO.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. this parameter enables the ‘Forced Intracell Handover’ procedure.0 (for more information see parameters SALUNAME (CREATE BTSM) and TEI (CREATE LPDLM).

0 ASUBENCAP=FALSE.0! SPEED145=FALSE. this attribute indicates whether the A interface resp. it is permanently set to FALSE. FALSE default: FALSE Value is fixed to FALSE in BR5. i. This parameter was prepared for BR5.0! EPREHSCSD=FALSE.5 and has no function in BR5. Single trunk mode (ASUBENCAP=TRUE) means that all physical ports (A and B ports) of a QTLP can be used for the connection of one TRAU.2000 Asub enhanced capacity allowed. A interface via satellite. This parameter was prepared for BR5. Speed 14. This parameter was prepared for BR5. range: TRUE. 23 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann. Maximum number of forced intracell handovers.e. it is permanently set to FALSE. Maximum AIUR downgrade level for NT data calls .5 and has no function in BR5. LPDLS is realized via satellite link (TRUE) or not (FALSE).SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. For further details please refer to the explanation provided for the parameter WMOD in the command CREATE PCMS.5 supported. SS7 link is realized via satellite link (TRUE) or not (FALSE). FALSE default: FALSE Value is fixed to FALSE in BR5. FALSE default: FALSE Value is fixed to FALSE in BR5. i.0. this enables the data service with 14.03. this attribute is only relevant if HSCSD is enabled (ENHSCSD=TRUE) and enables the preemption of HSCSD calls. range: default: TRUE. range: TRUE.0. FALSE default: FALSE Value is fixed to FALSE in BR5.5 and has no function in BR5.5 and has no function in BR5. range: TRUE. TAC3 SBS . This parameter was prepared for BR5.0. i.0! AISAT=FALSE.5 kbit/s speed. FALSE FALSE ASUBISAT=FALSE. range: default: 0-3 2 Version 30.5 and has no function in BR5.0. Enable preemption for HSCSD requests. Asub LAPD channel via satellite. This parameter was prepared for BR5. this attribute indicates whether the creation of PCMS objects in single trunk mode is allowed. it is permanently set to FALSE. This parameter was prepared for BR5.e. it is permanently set to FALSE. this attribute is only relevant if HSCSD is enabled (ENHSCSD=TRUE) and determines the maximum AIUR downgrade level for non-transparent data calls. ENFOIAHO=TRUE) and determines the maximum number of forced intracell handovers for HSCSD calls.0. this attribute is only relevant if HSCSD and forced HSCSD forced intracell handover intracell handover is enabled (ENHSCSD=TRUE. range: default: 1-3 2 MADGRLV=FALSE.e.e. range: TRUE.0. this attribute indicates whether the Asub resp.0! MAFIRACHO=FALSE. i.5 and has no function in BR5.

03. Minor. TAC3 SBS . Major. Minor. ALRMSEVBTS=CRITICAL. determines the alarm severity of the TRAU object. Major. Alarm severtity BTS. Critical Major ALRMSEVLPDLM=MAJOR. Major.0 Version 30. Critical Major ALRMSEVOMAL=MAJOR. range: default: Alarm severtity TRAU. determines the alarm severity of the PCMA object. Major. determines the alarm severity of the BTSM object. Major. range: default: Alarm severtity LPDLM. Minor. range: default: Alarm severtity LPDLR. determines the alarm severity of the PCMS object. Minor. Minor. determines the alarm severity of the LPDLS object. range: default: Alarm severtity CBCL. Object path name. Major. Major. determines the alarm severity of the PCMB object. Critical Major ALRMSEVPCMB=MAJOR. determines the alarm severity of the LPDLR object. Critical Major ALRMSEVLPDLS=MAJOR. range: default: Alarm severtity PCMB. Minor. range: default: Alarm severtity BTSM. Minor. Major. range: default: Alarm severtity PCMS. determines the alarm severity of the LPDLM object. Major. Major. determines the alarm severity of the CBCL object.2000 Setting the alarm priorities of the BSS functional objects: SET BSC PKGBSCS: NAME=BSC:0. Minor. Critical Major ALRMSEVLPDLR=MAJOR. Critical Major ALRMSEVPCMA=MAJOR. Critical Critical ALRMSEVTRX=MAJOR. Critical Major Setting the alarm priorities of the BSCE objects: 24 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann. determines the alarm severity of the OMAL object. range: default: Minor. determines the alarm severity of the TRX object. range: default: Minor. Critical Critical ALRMSEVBTSM=MAJOR. Critical Major ALRMSEVPCMS=MAJOR. Major. Alarm severtity TRX. Critical Major ALRMSEVCBCL =MAJOR. range: default: Alarm severtity OMAL. range: default: Alarm severtity PCMA. range: default: Alarm severtity LPDLS. Minor. Critical Major ALRMSEVTRAU=CRITICAL. Major. determines the alarm severity of the BTS object. Minor.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.

SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.0

Version 30.03.2000

SET BSCE PKGBSCES:
NAME=BSCE:0,

Object path name.

ALRMSEVDISK=MAJOR,

Alarm severtity DISK, determines the alarm severity of the DISK
object.

range:
default:

Minor, Major, Critical
Major

ALRMSEVDK40=MAJOR,
range:
default:

Minor, Major, Critical
Major

ALRMSEVEPWR=MAJOR,
range:
default:

25 / 142

Alarm severtity PPCC, determines the alarm severity of the PPCC
object.

Minor, Major, Critical
Major

ALRMSEVPPLD=MINOR,
range:
default:

Alarm severtity NTW, determines the alarm severity of the NTW
object.

Minor, Major, Critical
Major

ALRMSEVPPCC=MAJOR,
range:
default:

Alarm severtity MPCC, determines the alarm severity of the MPCC
object.

Minor, Major, Critical
Major

ALRMSEVNTW=MAJOR,
range:
default:

Alarm severtity MEMT, determines the alarm severity of the MEMT
object.

Minor, Major, Critical
Major

ALRMSEVMPCC=MAJOR,
range:
default:

Alarm severtity ME2M, determines the alarm severity of the ME2M
object.

Minor, Major, Critical
Major

ALRMSEVMEMT=MAJOR,
range:
default:

Alarm severtity LICDS, determines the alarm severity of the LICDS
object.

Minor, Major, Critical
Minor

ALRMSEVME2M=MAJOR,
range:
default:

Alarm severtity LICD, determines the alarm severity of the LICD
object.

Minor, Major, Critical
Minor

ALRMSEVLICDS=MINOR,
range:
default:

Alarm severtity IXLT, determines the alarm severity of the IXLT
object.

Minor, Major, Critical
Major

ALRMSEVLICD=MINOR,
range:
default:

Alarm severtity EPWR, determines the alarm severity of the EPWR
object.

Minor, Major, Critical
Major

ALRMSEVIXLT=MAJOR,
range:
default:

Alarm severtity DK40, determines the alarm severity of the DK40
object.

Alarm severtity PPLD, determines the alarm severity of the PPLD
object.

Minor, Major, Critical
Min or

Eckardt Bertermann, TAC3 SBS

SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.0

ALRMSEVPWRD=MAJOR,
range:
default:

Alarm severtity X25A, determines the alarm severity of the X25A
object.

Minor, Major, Critical
Major

ALRMSEVX25D=MAJOR,
range:
default:

Alarm severtity TDPC, determines the alarm severity of the TDPC
object.

Minor, Major, Critical
Major

ALRMSEVX25A=MAJOR,
range:
default:

Alarm severtity SYNE, determines the alarm severity of the SYNE
object.

Minor, Major, Critical
Major

ALRMSEVTDPC=MAJOR,
range:
default:

Alarm severtity SYNC, determines the alarm severity of the SYNC
object.

Minor, Major, Critical
Major

ALRMSEVSYNE=MAJOR,
range:
default:

Alarm severtity PWRD, determines the alarm severity of the PWRD
object.

Minor, Major, Critical
Major

ALRMSEVSYNC=MAJOR,
range:
default:

Version 30.03.2000

Alarm severtity X25D, determines the alarm severity of the X25D
object.

Minor, Major, Critical
Major

Creating the Power Supply:
CREATE EPWR:
NAME=BSCE:0/epwr:0;

Object path name.

CREATE EPWR:NAME=BSC:0/epwr:1;

Creating the spare PCM interface boards:
CREATE LICDS:
NAME=BSCE:0/licds:0,

Object path name.

LICDTYP=LICDQTLP;

Line interface card type, determines whether DTLP
(2 PCM ports) or QTLP boards (4 PCM ports) are used for the spare
boards. QTLPs are mandatory for use of half-rate speech.

range:
default:

LICDDTLP, LICDQTLP
LICDDTLP
(if NTWCARD=NTWSN64)
LICDQTLP
(if NTWCARD=NTWSN16)

CREATE LICDS:NAME=BSC:0/licds:1,LICDTYP=LICDQTLP;

26 / 142

Eckardt Bertermann, TAC3 SBS

SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.0

Version 30.03.2000

Creating the PCM interface boards:
CREATE LICD:
NAME=BSCE:0/licd:0,

Object path name.

LICDTYP=LICDQTLP,

Line interface card type, determines whether DTLP
(2 PCM ports) or QTLP boards (4 PCM ports) are used for the spare
boards. QTLPs are mandatory for use of half-rate speech.

range:
default:

LICDDTLP, LICDQTLP
LICDDTLP
(if NTWCARD=NTWSN64)
LICDQTLP
(if NTWCARD=NTWSN16)

ALARMT1=20,
unit:
range:
default:

0,1s
2-254
200=20s

ALARMT2=2,
unit:
range:
default:

0,1s
2-254
10=1s

ALARMT3=5,
unit:
range:
default:

5 min
1-254
1

ALACOUNT=32;
unit:
range:
default:

PCM alarm timer 1 determines the error-free time after which a
previously alarmed PCM line is put back to service, i.e. the line
returns to service after [ALARMT1∗ 0.1] error-free seconds.
PCM alarm timer 2 determines the time (1 unit = 0.1s) after which
an disturbed PCM line is put out of service, i.e. after [ALARMT2∗ 0.1]
seconds of line alarm the line is disabled.
Rules:
1) ALARMT2 < (TGUARD - TSBS)
(for TGUARD and TSBS see command SET OPC PKGSCCP). This
setting is only valid if the LICD is used for connection of a PCMS. It
avoids A-interface reset (and thus call release) procedures even if
the link interruption is very short.
2) ALARMT2 < TSYNC and ALARMT2 < TTRAU
(for TSYNC and TTRAU see command SET BTS PKGBTST)
This setting is necessary in order to avoid call release before PCM
alarm detection.
PCM alarm timer 3, determines the timeframe for the counting of
PCM line errors. A PCM line is set in ‘alarmed state’ if <ALACOUNT>
line errors are detected within [ALARMT3∗5] minutes
PCM alarm counter, determines the threshold for errors that lead to
a PCM alarm (see also previous parameter ALARMT3).

1
2-254
32

CREATE LICD:NAME=BSC:0/licd:1,LICDTYP=LICDQTLP,ALARMT1=20,ALARMT2=2,
ALARMT3=5,ALACOUNT=32;

27 / 142

Eckardt Bertermann, TAC3 SBS

03. is realized in a different way than for e.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. Deletion of the PPLD is not possible as long as the subordinate LAPD channels are not deleted as well. where there are special LICDs which are not numbered like the others but explicitely defined as ‘spare’. however. (spare) → Note: The PPLDs work in n+1 redundancy.0 Version 30.R.e. i. Object path name. 28 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann.g. The created LAPD channels are automatically distributed over the PPLDs created first .S) can only be interrogated by the ‘GETSUBO PPLD’ command. CREATE PPLD: NAME=BSC:0/ppld:2. This redundancy. For the PPLDs always the PPLD created last (like here the PPLD2) is automatically configured as spare.this assignment cannot be defined by command. TAC3 SBS . CREATE PPLD: NAME=BSC:0/ppld:1.2000 Creating the LAPD boards: CREATE PPLD: NAME=BSCE:0/ppld:0. So the actual association of LPDLX-links (X=M. the LICDs. in operation its status is ‘hot standby’.

resp. range: default: TRUE. 'Not urgent alarms' are signaled using the 5th bit of the NFAS signal (Service Word in timeslot 0 of the PCM system). PCM link: licd-no. E10_5 E10_3 BAF=2. > CREATE PCMB: NAME=BSC:0/pcmb:0. 0-1 (DTLP) port-no. SIMPLEXB DUPLEX SIMPLEXA Bit alignment frame. range: default: 29 / 142 Line code.the bits of the PCM30 ‘Service Word’ (or ‘Non-frame alignment signal’ NFAS). PCML=0-0. E10_3. SIMPLEXA. Here LREDUNEQ must be SIMPLEXA/B for STAR and MULTIDROP configuration and DUPLEX for LOOP configuration (where port B is used for the incoming end of the loop chain). multidrop configuration on the link. FALSE TRUE BER=E10_3. Link redundancy. Bit error rate. range: licd-no.licd-port-no. TAC3 SBS . FALSE FALSE CODE=HDB3..convertetd to binary format . determines the type of signal used on the PCMS. range: default: CRC enabled.0 Version 30.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.. AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion) and HDB3 use 1-signals of alternating polarity (e. .03.2000 Creating the PCM links for the Abis interface: < PCMB is the PCM link on the Abis interface. -1 and +1). HDB3 has additional functions to avoid longer ‘0’ periods by automatic insertion of so-called ‘violation’ bits if a longer ‘0’ period is detected. determines whether or not ‘not urgent alarms’ can be signaled.2) are reserved for fixed PCM link functions (CRC.7) can be set by the BAF parameter as the first 3 bits (0. range: default: 0-255 0 LREDUNEQ=SIMPLEXA. E10_4. ‘Not Urgent Alarm’ enabled. Object path name. The decimal value entered for this parameter determines . defines the bit-error-rate threshold that must be exceeded in order to raise a PCM alarm. Every logical LICD port consists of 2 physical ports A and B. range: default: TRUE. Eckardt Bertermann.). For the SBS BTS the bit 4 is used for synchronization aspects: If bit4 =1 the BTS assumes that the incoming signal is a suitable synchronization source. Bit6 = 1 indicates a loop. determines whether the cyclic redundancy check systems CRC4 (for PCM30 lines) respectively CRC6 (for PCM24 links) is enabled. 0-8 port-no. Although the value range of 0-255 allows to set all 8 bits only the last 5 bits (3. D-bit etc.g. range: default: HDB3. AMI HDB3 NUA=FALSE. 0-3 (QTLP) CRC=TRUE.

SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.0

(L1CTRLTS1=31-3),
range:

timeslot: 0-31 (for PCM30)
timeslot: 0-24 (for PCM24)
subslot: 0-3

Version 30.03.2000

Only for LOOP configuration: defines the dedicated layer1
supervision timeslot for loop direction switch. E.g. ‘31-3’ means:
layer1 supervision in timeslot 31, subslot 3.
Principle of loop configuration: All BTSEs in the loop and the BSC
permanently transmit a signal pattern via the layer-1 timeslot which
indicates 'idle' or 'failure'. This pattern is transmitted only in the
'forward' direction. The layer-2 setup messages, however, are
transmitted by all BTSEs in the loop (as well as by the BSC) in both
directions but received only from the currently 'active' direction (LI
port 1 or port 2). For this reason only in the 'active' direction the setup
of the higher layers takes place and the traffic and signaling
information is received only via the used LI port.
BSC

QTLP
port
A
QTLP
port
B

LI
port
1

BTSE
0
LI
port
2

LI
port
1

LI
port
2

BTSE
n

BTSE
1

LI
port
2

LI
port
1

= receive direction traffic & signaling
= transmit direction traffic & signaling
= transmit direction layer-1 timeslot

If on the L1TS the 'idle' pattern disappears or a 'failure' pattern is
received from the neighbour BTSE in the loop the BTSE immediately
changes the 'receive' direction to the other LI port. Moreover, the
BTSEs start to transmit 'failure' patterns via the L1TS. If a link
interruption occurs on a PCM-link between the BTSEs normally a fast
alignment is sufficient to setup of the higher layers after the direction
switch as the direction switch causes only very short LAPD
interruptions; if a link interruption occurs on the PCM link directly
connected to the BSC normally the direction switch is executed
without an additional alignment.
Note: For loop configurations this parameter is mandatory from
BR4.0 on as the possibility to use the SA7 bit has been removed.
LOWBER=0,
range:
default:

E10_3, E10_4, E10_5, E10_6,
E10_7, E10_8, E10_9,
E10_3

REMAL=CCITT;
range:
default:

30 / 142

Low bit error rate, this attribute is significant
only for PCM24 links.

Remote alarm, this attribute is significant
only for PCM24 links.

CCITT
BELLCORE
CCITT

Eckardt Bertermann, TAC3 SBS

SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.0

Version 30.03.2000

Creating the LPDLM links:
< The LPDLM link is the LAPD channel assigned to a BTS Site
Manager for O&M Information between BSC and BTSE. >
CREATE LPDLM:
NAME=BSC:0/lpdlm:0,

Object path name, the LPDLM-no. corresponds to the BTSM-no..
The range for the LPDLM-no. is 0-99.

Range of BTSM/LPDLM-no. extended
in BR5.0!

ABISCH=0-1,
range:

pcmb-no. 0-34
timeslot-no. 1-31 (PCM30)
timeslot-no. 1-24 (PCM24)
subslot-no. 0-3

TEI=0,
range:

0...63

LPDLMSAT=FALSE;
range:
TRUE, FALSE
default:
FALSE
Value is fixed to FALSE in BR5.0!

CREATE LPDLM:
NAME=BSC:0/lpdlm:1,
ABISCH=0-10,
TEI=1,LPDLMSAT=FALSE;

31 / 142

Abis channel: pcmb-no. - timeslot (- subslot).

Terminal endpoint identifier of LPDLM, this attribute defines the
TEI of the LPDLM resp BTSM. The TEI is the basic criteria used for
the network element identity verification during the alignment
procedure. In previous releases (up to BR4.5) the TEI had a fixed
(i.e. not changeable) correspondence to the relative object number of
the LPDLM resp. BTSM (i.e. BTSM/LPDLM-no.=TEI-no.). This
approach had the disadvantage that in case of BTSE swap the TEI
had to be manually changed in the BTSE to the new LPDLM-no. in
the new BSC. As a temporary solution, the parameter FIXTEI was
introduced which allowed to set all TEIs of the BTSMs to ‘0’. The
parameter FIXTEI was removed in BR5.0 as from BR5.0 on the TEI
can be explicitely set for every LPDLM by the parameter TEI. Thus in
case of a swap of BTSE from one BSC to another, the TEI can be
easily set in the database of the new BSC by the SET LPDLM
command without any necessity to modify the BTSE data on site. As
with this new approach one and the same TEI can be used more
than once within a BSC, another BTSE specific identity can optionally
be used to unambiguously identify the BTSE during the alignment
procedure: the Sales Unique Name (see command CREATE BTSM,
parameter SALUNAME).
LPDLM via satellite, this attribute indicates whether the Abis resp.
LPDLM is realized via satellite link (TRUE) or not (FALSE).
This parameter was prepared for BR5.5 and has no function in
BR5.0, i.e. it is permanently set to FALSE.

Note: In this case both LPDLMs are created on the same PCMB
because a multidrop chain is configured.

Eckardt Bertermann, TAC3 SBS

SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.0

Version 30.03.2000

Creating the BTS Site Manager:
< The BTS Site Manager represents the functionality that controls
one or more BTSs within one BTSE. It performs all the Operation &
Maintenance functions common to all transceivers.>
CREATE BTSM:
NAME=BSC:0/btsm:0,
Range of BTSM-no. extended in BR5.0!

Object path name, the BTSM-no. corresponds to the BTSE no.. The
range for the BTSM-no. is 0-99.

EXPSWV="01-01-08-00-0700_98-7-21",

Expected SW version, this SW version must be available and
loaded in the BTSE. If it is not available the BTSE automatically
requests a download of this SW version from the BSC.

SHLAPDIT=5,

Short LAPD interruption timer, this parameter represents a BSC
timer which is started after the detection of a LAPD interruption on
the Abis link. As long as this timer runs all active calls are
maintained, i.e. kept alive. If the LAPD interruption exceeds the
actual value of SHLAPDIT (<entered value> + 30s) all calls in the
affected BTSE are released and a ‘full alignment’ is performed after
link recovery. If the LAPD link comes up again before the timer
expires only a ‘fast alignment’ procedure is started. ‘Fast alignment’
is a subset of the ‘full alignment’ and comprises only the state
alignment and the alarm alignment, but not the creation of functional
objects. Please see also the explanation for OMLAPDRT.
This timer is also used for supervision of RSL. If an RSL fails for
longer than this time limit (O&M link survives) only the channels of
the affected TRX are released.
Impotant Note:
The actual value of the SHLAPDIT is <entered value> + 30 s !

unit:
range:
default:

1s
3-20
15

OMLAPDRT=40,
unit:
range:
default:

32 / 142

1s
3-300
30

O&M LAPD release timer, this parameter represents a BTSE timer
which is started after the detection of a LAPD (i.e. layer 2)
interruption on the Abis link. Call processing activity (i.e. BCCH
active) on the BTSE will not be blocked as long as this timer runs.
When the timer expires the BTSE call processing is blocked and
functional related Managed Objects are deleted. In this case a full
alignment is necessary to put the BTSE in service again after the
Abis link has come up again.
Summary: On detection of an Abis LAPD link failure the BTSE starts
the timer OMLAPDRT and the BSC starts the timer SHLAPDIT. If the
OMLAPDRT exspires the BTSE blocks the call processing. On link
reestablishment the BTSE forces the BSC to perform a full Abis
alignment if one of the two timers has exspired. If none of the two
timers exspires, the BSC performs a ‘Short Abis Alignment’.
Application: The timers SHLAPDIT and OMLAPDRT are relevant for
a) LAPD interruption due to PPLD switch
b) LAPD interruption to a certain BTSE within a multidrop chain. Here
it has to be considered that the failure of the PCMB object (i.e. PCM
link error between BSC and the first BTSE in the chain) always leads
to a full alignment of all BTSEs in the chain after link recovery.
However, if the PCM link error occurs between two BTSEs in the
chain a full alignment is avoided if the link comes up before expiry of
SHLAPDIT.
Notes:
- OMLAPDRT should always be greater than SHLAPDIT since a fast
alignment (SHLAPDIT not yet exspired when the layer 2 comes up)
only makes sense if call processing has not been blocked by the
expiry of OMLAPDRT before!
- For both timers some additional delay time for the detection of the
layer 2 failure (up to 10 s) has to be taken into account.

Eckardt Bertermann, TAC3 SBS

This behavior is not administrable. Emergency timer 2. If it expires the BTSE enters the ’zero carrier configuration’.5) the (LPDLM-)TEI was the only criteria used for the network element identity verification during the alignment procedure. unit: range: default: 1min 0-360 10 EMT2=0. The new approach using the Sales Unique Name in addition to an individually configurable TEI allows a much higher flexibility in the allocation of the BTSEs to the BSCs (with minimization of efforts in case of BTSE swap) without loss of savety. All other modules are switched off. The timer EMT2 is started when the BTSE enters the ’BTSE emergency carrier configuration’. 0 SALUNAME=”BSC1BTSE0”. If no microwave equipment is used the ’zero carrier configuration’ should be disabled (EMT2=0). The timer EMT1 is started when the alarm ’ACDC MAINS BREAKDOWN’ occurs. In previous releases (up to BR4. TAC3 SBS . Note: All BTSE types also enter the ’zero carrier configuration’ if the alarm ’RACK OVERTEMPERATURE’ is raised. The purpose of the ’BTSE zero carrier configuration’ is to keep the central control modules available if microwave-equipment is used. this parameter indicates the delay for the transition to ’BTSE zero carrier configuration’ in case of breakdown of the BTSE primary power supply if a battery backup is available in the BTSE. Note: BTSE emergency configuration can also be entered as a result of excessive shelter temperature in BS61 BTSEs (see explanation of parameter MOEC (CREATE TRX)).03. this attribute defines every Network Element by its unique symbolic name.0 EMT1=10. It can be optionally used for the network element identity verification during the alignment phase in addition to the TEI (see CREATE LPDLM). unit: range: default: 1min 0-360 0 = switch to ’zero carrier configuration’ disabled. this parameter indicates the delay for the transition to the ’BTSE emergency configuration’ in case of breakdown of the BTSE primary power supply if a battery backup is available in the BTSE. ’BTSE emergency configuration’ means that only the central BTSE control modules and the HW serving those TRXs which have been explicitely declared a ’Member of emergency configuration’ (see parameter MOEC (CREATE TRX)) are powered. If it expires the BTSE enters the ’BTSE emergency configuration’. range: default: 33 / 142 alphanumeric string (11 characters + NULL terminated) NOT_DEFINED Version 30.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.2000 Emergency timer 1. ’BTSE zero carrier configuration’ means that only the central BTSE control modules are powered. All other modules are switched off (call processing disabled). Eckardt Bertermann. The purpose of the ’BTSE emergency configuration’ is to save energy as long as the BTSE is suppplied by the battery backup and thus to delay the point of time when the battery runs out of current (BTSE power off). Sales Unique Name.

format: Version 30.PCMCON0=PCMB_0PORT_0. PORT_6 (only BTSplus) pcmbNumber0: NOT_DEFINED portNumber0: NOT_DEFINED CREATE BTSM:NAME=BSC:0/btsm:0. pcmbNumber0 portNumber0 pcmbNumber0: PCMB_0 . format: range: range: default: PCM connection 0.0 PCMCON0=PCMB_0PORT_0.EXPSWV="01-01-08-00-07-00_98-07-21"..PCMCON1=NOT_DEFINED-NOT_DEFINED. this attribute indicates the main PCM connection for the given BTSM. PCMB_34 portNumber0: PORT_0.03. pcmbNumber0 portNumber0 pcmbNumber0: PCMB_0 .e. 34 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann. OMLAPDRT=40. PCMB_34 portNumber0: PORT_0.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.SALUNAME=”BSC1BTSE1”.SHLAPDIT=5. i.e. PORT_2.EMT2=0. it indicates which PCMB does NOT carry the LPDLM and to which BTSM port it is connected. PORT_4 (only BTSplus).EMT1=10.. it indicates which PCMB carries the LPDLM and to which BTSM port it is connected. this attribute indicates the first auxiliar PCM connection for the given BTSM. PORT_6 (only BTSplus) PCMCON1=PCMB_0PORT_0. TAC3 SBS . PORT_4 (only BTSplus).2000 PCM connection 1. i. PORT_2.

Within these messages MCC-MNC-LAC make up the IE ‘Location Area Identification’ and CI corresponds to the IE ‘Cell Identity’. BCC= Base Station Colour Code. was extended to 0-149 in BR5. The BTS does not come up in case of a mismatch! Range extended in BR5.03.03 GSM 04. SYS_INFO_Type 4 does not contain the CI but only the LAI.0.08 BSIC=7-7.BCC.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. Creating a cell with definition of global parameters: < With this command all cell specific attributes not related to Common Control Channels are set. this number must correspond to the number of the antenna combiner used by the BTS (BTSR equal to the ACOM/FICOM position inside the rack!). NCC= Network Colour Code.08 GSM 05. within the BTSE. Within one PLMN more than one NCC may be allowed. In other words: From the BCC in the SCH the MS knows the TSC of the BCCH it has to select.0! BTSR=0. range: BTS Site Manager-no. extended in BR5. The BCC must correspond to the Training Sequence Code (TSC) assigned to the BCCH of that cell.08 GSM 04. The range for the BTS-No. The format is "MCC"-"MNC"-LAC-CI. range: Reference: MCC: "0-999" MNC: "0-999" (PCS1900) MNC: "0-99" (all others) LAC: 0-65535 CI: 0-65535 GSM 03. Object path name. Range of BTS-no. MCC= Mobile Country Code (identifies the country) MNC= Mobile Network Code (identifies the network within the country) LAC = Location Area Code (identifies the location area within the network) CI = Cell Identitiy (identifies the cell within the location area) This info is sent downlink on the BCCH (SYS_INFO_Type3 or 4) or on the SACCH (SYS_INFO_Type6).02 Cell Global Identity. The BCC is used by the MS to correctly decode the BCCH. Base Station Identity Code is sent downlink in the SCH.2000 F General hint concerning the SYSTEM INFORMATION messages: Some of the parameters in the following commands appear as information elements in the SYSTEM_INFORMATION_TypeX messages. > CREATE BTS PKGBTSB: NAME=BSC:0/bts:0. Eckardt Bertermann. this digit string unambiguously identifies a cell within the worldwide GSM system. TAC3 SBS . care needs to be taken to ensure that the same NCC is not used in adjacent PLMNs which may use the same BCCH carrier frequencies in neighbouring areas. Please note that SYSTEM_INFORMATION_Type1 to _Type4 are sent on the BCCH if the MS is in idle mode and SYSTEM_INFORMATION_Type5 to _Type6 are sent on the SACCH if the MS is in busy mode. 0-99 Range extended in BR5. range: 0-2 for BTS1 (SAG BTS) and for BSF0 (BTS_902) 0-1 for BS1x (:BTS) 0-11 for BTSplus BTS-no.. The format is NCC .03 GSM 03.0 Version 30. The BCC is selected by default as TSC for the BCCH when it is created (see also CREATE CHAN). range: Reference: 35 / 142 NCC: 0-7 BCC: 0-7 GSM 03.0! BTSMN=0. From the NCC the MS determines which cells are allowed for cell selection and handover (see also parameter PLMNP).0! CELLGLID="262"-"02"10-101. From the point of view of network planning.

P Max (B. Cell reselect hysteresis. 30-31 30=33dBm.08 CELLRESH=2.08 GSM 04.g.) The MS calculates the path loss criterion for the serving and the nonserving cell at least every 5 seconds (the MS derives the necessary calculation parameters from the BCCHs of the serving and the neighbour cells). or CHAN ACT for a new TCH in case of handover).20 MSTXPMAX=2. 31=32dBm Note: Increasing the entered value decreases the allowed transmit power.Max(B.0)) where A = <received level average> . in this command. This info determines the value of the IE 'MS Power' in the first CHANNEL ACTIVATION message sent by the BSC for a call context (e.22 GSM 12.0)= 0 if MTXPMAXCH < P P = Maximum RF output power of the MS (see table below).0)= MTXPMAXCH . Value range: GSM900: 2-15 default: 2=39dBm (stepsize -2dBm) DCS1800: 0-15 default: 0=30dBm (stepsize -2dBm) GSMR: 2-15 default: 2=39dBm (stepsize -2dBm) PCS1900: 0-15 default: 0=30dBm (stepsize -2dBm). range: default: Reference: 0-255 4 GSM 03.03 GSM 04. MTXPMAXCH see SET BTS PKGBTSC. The 8-bit string is used as a ‘bit-map’. For details regarding the power classes and power control levels please refer to the GSM-tables on the following page.08 GSM 03. (RXLEVAMI see param. TAC3 SBS . Eckardt Bertermann. indicates the value of the receiver RF power level hysteresis required for cell reselection (MS in idle mode) on the basis of the path loss criterion C1.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. If C1 of the non-serving cell is higher than C1 of the serving cell for a period of 5 s then the MS performs a cell reselection. CHAN ACT for an SDCCH in case of call setup.0 PLMNP=128.2000 PLMN permitted.10 36 / 142 Version 30.08 GSM 05. Maximum transmission power level a MS is allowed to use in the serving cell. unit.05 GSM 04. This mechanism is used to avoid unnecessary location update procedures.22 GSM 12. The value of CELLRESH is sent on the BCCH (SYS_INFO_Type3 and 4) in the IE ‘Cell Selection Parameters’.08 GSM 02. Exception: If the current cell and the new cell belong to different location areas the new cell shall only be selected if the path loss criterion C1 on the new cell exceeds C1 on the old serving cell by at least CELLRESH for a period of 5 seconds. The calculation result determines the priority of these cells within the list of the six strongest neighbour cells which is dynamically managed in the MS in idle mode. In the 'MS Power' IEs of the following CHAN ACT messages as well as in the 'Power Command' IEs contained in the ASSIGNMENT COMMAND and HANDOVER COMMAND messages the allowed power level is additionally determined by the MS power capability (whichever is lower) which is provided by the MS in the IE 'MS classmark' in the CM SERVICE REQUEST message. this parameter corresponds to the IE ‘NCC Permitted’. Note: The C1 criterion can be replaced by the C2 criterion (see parameter CRESPARI) if the appropriate parameters are provided via the BCCH. C1 = (A . The decimal value entered is sent to the MS as an 8-bit string on the BCCH (SYS_INFO_Type 2) in order to indicate allowed NCCs for cell selection (idle) or on the SACCH (SYS_INFO_Type6 ) in order to indicate allowed NCCs for measurement reports (busy). unit: range: default: Reference: 2dB 0-7 2 GSM 05.RXLEVAMI Max (B. The path loss criterion is satisfied if C1 > 0 (If C1 has been < 0 for a period of 5 s the path to the cell is regarded as lost).11 GSM 05. every ‘1’ bit indicates that the NCC corresponding to the bit position is allowed.08 GSM 03. range and default values see explanation to the right! Reference: GSM 05.03.

05 MS Power classes GSM 900 DCS 1800 Power control level Nominal Output power (dBm) Power control level Nominal Output power (dBm) 0-2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19-31 39 37 35 33 31 29 27 25 23 21 19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 29 30 31 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15-28 36 34 32 30 28 26 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0 from: GSM 05.03.---- 1 W (30 dBm) ±2 ± 2.5 4 2 W (33 dBm) ±2 ± 2.5 5 0.5 3 5 W (37 dBm) 4 W (36 dBm) ±2 ± 2.5 NOTE: The lowest nominal output power for all classes of GSM 900 MS is 5 dBm and for all classes of DCS 1 800 MS is 0 dBm.05 37 / 142 Power Control Levels Eckardt Bertermann.2000 DCS 1800 Nominal Maximum output power Tolerance (dB) for conditions normal extreme 1 -.25 W (24 dBm) ±2 ± 2. from GSM: 05. TAC3 SBS .8 W (29 dBm) ±2 ± 2.0 Power class GSM 900 Nominal Maximum output power Version 30.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.5 2 8 W (39 dBm) 0.

08 GSM 03.. It is used by the MS to calculate the maximum value of the radio link counter (‘S’ counter) in the MS which is needed to detect a radio link failure in the downlink (a similar counter is realized in the BTS for the uplink. The ‘radio link timeout’ value is the start point for the ‘S’ counter in the BTS and the MS which is in effect if the mobile is in ‘dedicated’ (or ‘busy’) mode. see parameter RDLNKTBS (SET PWRC)).64. unit: range: default: Reference: 1 dB 0-63 0 = less than -110dBm 1 = -110dBm to -109dBm 2 = -109dBm to -108dBm ..RACH busy threshold (RACHBT) .0 on the BTS decodes the Synchronization sequence bits of the RACH burst before the decision based on the entered level is made. The general purpose of this parameter is to avoid unnecessary load on the SDCCHs by normal noise signals being decoded as RACH bursts (followed by seizure of SDCCH) by mistake. Note: The value entered for this parameter is not only relevant for the CHANNEL REQUEST message on the RACH but also for the HANDOVER ACCESS message on the FACCH! The principle is exactly the same as for the RACH. the setting of RACHBT also has an influence on the handover success rate. 62 = -49dBm to -48dBm 63 = greater than -48dBm 6 GSM 05.measurement period (see parameter RACHLAS = RACH load averaging slots) . TAC3 SBS .reporting rate (see parameter PCCCHLDI = CCCH load indication period) Eckardt Bertermann.08 GSM 04.22 RDLNKTO=7.The BTS measures the signal level on each RACH timeslot and determines whether a channel request is successfully received or not: If the received signal level is greater than or equal to the value of RACHBT then the RACH burst in question will be indicated as busy (one or more mobile stations have tried to access the network). successful decoding to an increase by 2.08 RACHBT=127. Setting RXLEVAMI to a high value means that only those MSs attempt an access to the cell which are in a location with good coverage conditions. range: default: Reference: 0-15 0 = counter value 4 15 = counter value 64 7 GSM 05. It is used together with other parameters to define the path loss criterion C1 for cell selection and reselection (see param. CELLRESH). Thus the number of handover requests may be reduced.2000 Minimum received level at the MS required for access to the network. Radio link timeout.03. the value entered for this parameter determines the value of the parameter RADIO_LINK_TIMEOUT which is sent on the BCCH (SYS_INFO_Type3) or on the SACCH (SYS_INFO_Type6) in the IE ‘Cell Options’. defines a threshold for the signal level on the RACH.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. RACH busy threshold. This info is sent on the BCCH (SYS_INFO_Type3 and 4) in the IE ‘Cell Selection Parameters’. The maximum value S0 of the S-counter in the MS is calculated as follows: S0 = 4 + 4∗ RDLNKTO Its range is 4.. To allow a better distinction of real RACHs from ‘phantom’ RACHs from BR3.08 GSM 04.0 RXLEVAMI=6. unit: range: default: 38 / 142 -1dBm 0-127 127 Version 30. If the ‘S’ counter reaches 0. Thus. Unsuccessful decoding of SACCH messages by the transceiver lead to a decrease of the ‘S’ counter by 1. a radio link failure is declared and the connection is terminated. If ‘Call Re-Establishment’ (see parameter CREALL) is enabled a low value of radio link time-out increases the number of call reestablishments because a decrease of RDLNKTO leads to an earlier declaration of radio link failures. RACHBT is also relevant for the BTS load recognition procedure for the RACH which is controlled by the O&M-parameters .

‘extended cell’ . range: default: STDCELL EXTCELL STDCELL Value UMBCELL canceled in BR4. Cell type. unit: range: default: 1 half burst 0-7 5 CELLTYPE=STDCELL.08 Version 30. bd. FACCHs are normal speech bursts which are ’abused’ as signaling channels. If . BCCHFREQ 10 = C10) of that carrier which contains the FCH. EXTCHO. this value is a threshold used by the BTS to inform the BSC about the load on the CCCH. If CELLTYPE is set to EXTCELL the parameters HOTMSRME.max. specifies the Um channel no. Threshold for CCCH load indication. Period of CCCH load indication. MS distance 100 km. indicates the frequency band used by the traffic channels. phase1 mobiles are not supported. (e. SCH. unit: range: default: 1% 0-100 100 PCCCHLDI=255. defines the number of FACCH halfburst to be received for detecting a FACCH frame. the extension band. unit: range: default: 1s 0-255 255 FACCHQ=5.08 BCCHFREQ=10.2000 RACH load averaging slots. The CCCH load indication is only sent to the BSC if TCCCHLDI is reached. BCCH and CCCH. range: default: 102-65535 204 TCCCHLDI=100. The general speech coding algorithm codes 20ms of speech to 456 bits and distributes it over 8 halfbursts. The FACCHQ parameter determines how many halfbursts with the correct steal-bits must have been received to regard a received half-burst sequence as FACCH frame. It is used in the PCH and AGCH load measurements.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. System Indicator.) EXT900 (GSM mixed band) GSMR (railway GSM).max.0 RACHLAS=204.03. Note: The features 'Extended Cell' and 'Concentric Cell' (see CONCELL) exclude each other. If EXT900 is selected the GSM base band is still usable for phase1 mobiles.5! SYSID=BB900. however.08 GSM 05. Within the ’Normal Bursts’ the so-called ’steal-bits’ are used to distinguish TCH from FACCH info. For the PCH it determines the percentage of possible paging requests stored in the BTS before CCCH load indication is sent to the BSC.the steal-bits are falsified the FACCH halfbursts may be recognized as TCH by mistake. defines the number of RACH bursts over which RACH measurements are performed by the BTS (see also parameter RACHBT). Rule: RACHLAS ≤ PCCCHLDI. For the RACH the parameter determines the percentage of RACH slots related to RACHLAS (see previous parameter) that have to be considered busy before a CCCH load indication is sent to the BSC. Eckardt Bertermann. The BTS reports these measurements to the BSC according to the setting of the parameter PCCCHLDI. FACCH quality.g. possible values: ‘standard cell’ . can only be used for traffic purposes by phase2 mobiles. PCS1900 GSM 04. range: Reference: 39 / 142 0-1023 GSM 04. this value indicates the time distance between two CCCH load indication messages sent to the BSC (see also parameters RACHBT and RACHLAS). If F2ONLY900 is selected only phase2 mobiles can be used. MS distance 35km. HOMSTAM and HOMRGTA (see SET HAND) and EXTMODE (see CREATE CHAN) are relevant. BCCH frequency. range: Reference: BB900 (GSM baseband) DCS1800 F2ONLY900 (GSM ext.due to transmissen problems on the radio interface . ’Halfburst’ means that the speech information of one 20ms speech block is contained in one half of the burst only (due to the interleaving one burst carries the information for two different 20ms-speech-blocks). TAC3 SBS .

range: Reference: 40 / 142 0-1023 each field GSM 04. in the ASSIGMENT COMMAND) in the IE ‘Cell Channel Description’. Notes: .From BR4.02 GSM 12.0 on the CALL does no longer contain the BCCH frequency ! Eckardt Bertermann.DCS etc.g. .SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. in which for every frequency of the used band (GSM. If the bit position is ’1’ then the frequency represented by this bit position is included in the ’cell allocation’.08 GSM 05. If frequency hopping is enabled the ‘Cell Channel Description’ IE is needed by the MS to decode the info in the IE ‘Mobile Allocation’ which specifies the frequencies used in the frequency hopping sequence.) an own bit position is provided.20 Version 30. TAC3 SBS .2000 Cell allocation. defines the set of radio frequencies allocated to the cell. The ‘Cell Channel Description’ is a bit map (different formats are possible).0 CALL=60&80&110.The SYS_INFO_Type1 is only sent if frequency hopping is used. This info is sent on the BCCH (SYS_INFO_Type1) or/and on the main DCCH (contained e.03.

indicates the presence of C2 cell reselection parameters in the IE ‘SI 4 Rest Octets’ on the BCCH (SYS_INFO_Type 4).03. 41 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann. TAC3 SBS . CBQ are skipped. C2 C1 + CRESOFF TEMPOFF CRESOFF C1 C1 + CRESOFF .e. If CRESPARI is set to ‘0’ the parameters CRESOFF. i. 260s) the permanent offset (CRESOFF) is not added to but substracted. TEMPOFF.0 CRESPARI=1. This mechanism is used to avoid unnecessary location update procedures.TEMPOFF as long as the timer (PENTIME) runs and PENTIME < 31 Equation B: C2 = C1 + CRESOFF if the timer (PENTIME) has exspired and PENTIME < 31 Equation C:C2 = C1 .e. It is an enhancement of the cell selection C1 (for C1 please see parameter CELLRESH). Depending on the availablility of C2 cell reselection parameters in the BCCH info the MS considers C1 or C2 for the cell reselection process. Exception: If the current cell and the new cell belong to different location areas the new cell shall only be selected if the C2 of the new cell exceeds C2 of the old serving cell by at least the cell reselect hysteresis (see parameter CELLRESH) for a period of 5 seconds. 0=not present.TEMPOFF t PENTIME start of timer expiry of timer Equation C: If the penalty time is set to 31 (i.if the C2 of a nonserving cell still exceeds the one of the serving cell for a period of 5 s the MS performs a cell reselection.08 GSM 03. Equation A: C2 = C1 + CRESOFF . setting PENTIME to 31 results in a permanent decrease of priority. 1=present. range: default: Reference: 0=parameters not present 1=parameters present 1 GSM 05.2000 Cell reselection parameter indicator. PENTIME. Equation B: On expiry of the timer the temporary offset is disregarded and thus . is useful for microcellconfigurations since it prevents fast moving MSs from performing unnecessary cell reselections.22 Version 30.CRESOFF if PENTIME = 31 Equation A: As long as the timer runs C2 is increased by a permanent offset (see parameter CRESOFF) and decreased by a temporary offset (see parameter TEMPOFF). The result of this calculation determines the priority of these cells within the list of the six strongest neighbour cells which is dynamically managed in the MS in idle mode. General Principle of the C2 algorithm: If the MS places a non-serving cell on the list of six strongest carriers it starts a timer the value of which has been broadcast on the BCCH (see parameter PENTIME). By this temporary offset the C2 of the non-serving cell is artificially made worse and the cell reselection is not executed. C2. The criterion C2 is an optional feature that can be enabled on a cell basis. however.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. The MS calculates C2 (on the basis of C1) or C1 respectively (if the C2 cell reselection parameters are not broadcast in the affected cell) for the serving and all neighbour cells at least every 5 s.

in each of the frequency bands in the BA list. with known and allowed NCC part of BSIC.08 GSM 03. The remaining positions in the measurement report shall be used for reporting of cells in the band of the serving cell.08 GSM 03. is one of the necessary input values for the calculation of C2. This parameter only has to be set if CRESPARI is set to ‘1’. is one of the necessary input values for the calculation of C2.The MS shall report the strongest cell. is used to assign a priority to a cell for the cell selection process. Eckardt Bertermann. unit: range: default: Reference: 20s 0-31 31= TEMPOFF ignored S100 GSM 05. If there are still remaining positions. contained in the IE ‘SI 4 Rest Octets’ on the BCCH (SYS_INFO_Type4). 3 . Cell bar qualify. with known and allowed NCC part of BSIC. It applies a negative offset to C2 for the duration of the penalty time. to assign the normal priority (0) to the microcell layer and the lower priority (1) to the macro and umbrella cell layers. This parameter only has to be set if CRESPARI is set to ‘1’. excluding the frequency band of the serving cell.08 GSM 03. specifies the number of cells (not belonging to the frequency band of the serving cell) to be monitored by the MS. unit: 10dB range: 0-7.Normal reporting of the six strongest cells.22 CBQ=0. The remaining positions in the measurement report shall be used for reporting of cells in the band of the serving cell. A suitable cell with low priority is only selected if no suitable cell of normal priority can be found. 7=∞ default: 1 Reference: GSM 05. For further details please refer to the parameter CRESPARI. For further details please refer to the parameter CRESPARI. If there are still remaining positions.The MS shall report the two strongest cells. unit: 2dB range: 0-63 default: 1 Reference: GSM 05. It allows e.The MS shall report the three strongest cells. these shall be used to report the next strongest identified cells in the other bands irrespective of the band used.22 NMBULAC=0. 2 . in each of the frequency bands in the BA list. For further details please refer to the parameter CRESPARI. This parameter.g. This parameter only has to be set if CRESPARI is set to ‘1’. in each of the frequency bands in the BA list.22 PENTIME=0. It applies an offset to the cell reselection criterion C2. This info is sent in the IE ‘SI 4 Rest Octets’ on the BCCH (SYS_INFO_Type4). irrespective of the band used.08 GSM 03. This parameter only has to be set if CRESPARI is set to ‘1’. these shall be used to report the next strongest identified cells in the other bands irrespective of the band used. This parameter. If there are still remaining positions. Possible values: 0 . excluding the frequency band of the serving cell. contained in the IE ‘SI 4 Rest Octets’ on the BCCH (SYS_INFO_Type4).0 CRESOFF=1. sets the duration for which the temporary offset is applied. The assignment of CBQ is useful in hierarchical cell structures. excluding the frequency band of the serving cell. The remaining positions in the measurement report shall be used for reporting of cells in the band of the serving cell.03. Penalty time. This parameter. with known and allowed NCC part of BSIC. range: default: Reference: 0= normal priority 1=low priority 0 GSM 05.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.2000 Cell reselection offset. TAC3 SBS .08 Version 30. these shall be used to report the next strongest identified cells in the other bands irrespective of the band used. Thus the traffic managment for cell selection and location update can at least partly be adapted to the priority layers assigned to the cells for traffic managment of busy MS. contained in the IE ‘SI 4 Rest Octets’ on the BCCH (SYS_INFO_Type4). is one of the necessary input values for the calculation of C2.22 TEMPOFF=1. with known and allowed NCC part of BSIC. Multi band cell. Temporary offset. range: default: Reference: 42 / 142 0-3 0 GSM 05. 1 .

These handovers are executed on level / distance conditions defined by appropriate thresholds in the handover package (see parameters CCDIST.BTSR=0. during the call setup procedure in a concentric cell the same values are also evaluated to determine whether the call is set up on a TCH belonging to an inner or complete area TRX.5 and has no function in BR5. FALSE FALSE GSM 04. range: default: Reference: TRUE. this flag defines whether the cell is a concentric one or not.PCCCHLDI=255. CONCELL cannot be set to TRUE if CELLTYPE=EXTCELL. CREATE BTS PKGBTSB:NAME=bsc:0/bts:1. HORXLVDLI. RXLEVAMI=6.BTSSUPP145=FALSE.NMBULAC=0.TEMPOFF=1. Within a concentric cell CC-specific intra-cell handovers from the inner to the complete area and vice versa are possible.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. A ‘concentric cell’ is a cell in which different TRX may have different ranges.SYSID=BB900.PENTIME=0.0.e.BTSMN=1. COMPLETE area INNER area Whether a TRX serves the inner or the complete area is defined in the TRX object (see parameter TRXAREA (CREATE TRX)). i.BCCHFREQ=71.PLMNP=128. TAC3 SBS . this attribute indicates whether HSCSD service is activated in the cell or not. it is permanently set to FALSE.0! HSCSD enabled for the BTS.RACHLAS=204. range: TRUE. BTSHSCSD=FALSE. BSIC=7-7. Note: As a precondition for HSCSD the feature ‘early classmark sending’ (see SET BTS PKGBTSO:ENAECLA) must be enabled! BTS support of 14.TCCCHLDI=100.FACCHQ=5. CRESOFF=1.CRESPARI=1.0 CONCELL=FALSE.MSTXPMAX=2. FALSE default: FALSE Value is fixed to FALSE in BR5. Note: The features 'Extended Cell' and 'Concentric Cell' exclude each other.CBQ=0. This parameter was prepared for BR5.CELLGLID="262"-"02"-11-111. BTSHSCSD=FALSE. 43 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann. TRXs with the wider range serve the so-called ‘complete area’. The different TRX ranges are determined by the values entered for the power reduction (see parameter PWRRED (CREATE TRX)). i.e. CELLTYPE=STDCELL.5 service. Moreover.08 BTSSUPP145=FALSE.RDLNKTO=3.2000 Concentric cell.CALL=62. FALSE FALSE Version 30.5 kbit/s data service.CELLRESH=2. range: default: TRUE. HORXLVDLO and HOCCDIST (SET HAND)). this attribute indicates whether the BTS supports the 14.CONCELL=FALSE. RACHBT=127.03. TRXs with the smaller range serve the so-called ‘inner area’.

determines the number of RACH slots an MS must wait after an unsuccessful random access attempt before a new one can be started. 3 and 4) in the IE ‘RACH Control Parameters’. TWO. The follwing setting is necessary to avoid the transmission of the CONN FAIL indication while the MS falls back to the old channel due to unsuccessful access to the target cell and thus an unjustified registration of a ‘call drop’: NY1*T3105 > T3124+delta T3124 is the MS timer which waits for the PHYSICAL INFO after the transmission of the HANDOVER ACCESS message in the target cell. a low value will delay the access and may result in cell reselection and therefore in a delay or unsuccessful cell access if no other cell is available. Eckardt Bertermann. This info is sent on the BCCH (SYS_INFO_Type1.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. If the value of NSLOTST is to be decreased in case of high traffic density on the RACH it should be done in small steps with close observation of the load situation on the RACH in order to prevent RACH overload.08 NSLOTST=15. 2. If a small value of NSLOTST is chosen a "temporary local" overload may occur if a small number of subscribers try to access the system in very short intervals. SEVEN ONE GSM 04. 2. Note: Any CONN FAIL is a trigger event for the TCH loss counter NRFLTCH. > SET BTS PKGBTSC: NAME=BSC:0/bts:0. defines the maximum number of retransmission attempts the MS can perform on the RACH if the previous attempts have not been successful. NY1. Object path name. TAC3 SBS . If the BTS has not received the SABM from the MS after transmission of the last PHYS INFO message and expiry of timer T3105 (see T3105 in command SET BTS PKGBTST) the BTS sends a CONNECTION FAILURE indication with casue ‘Handover access failure’ to the BSC and the new allocated channels are released. indicates the maximum number of repetitions of PHYSICAL INFORMATION messages from the network to the MS during an asynchronous handover.08 NY1=20.2000 Setting the cell specific attributes for the CCCH: < All attribute values set by this command (except for ny1) have effects on the SYSTEM INFORMATION messages on the BCCH. In case of RACH overload a decrease of MAXRETR can be used to decreases the number of access attempts of the MSs and therefore the RACH overload without barring any access classes (see parameter NALLWACC in command SET BTS PKGBTSO). A high value may extend the duration of location update. This info is sent on the BCCH (SYS_INFO_Type1.08 GSM 05. range: default: Reference: 0-15 9 GSM 04. FOUR. The PHYS INFO message contains the actual timing advance which the BTS derives from the time delay of the handover access burst. 3 and 4) in the IE ‘RACH Control Parameters’. The MS starts cell reselection with a new cell. MAXRETR=ONE. The level of MAXRETR has an impact on the RACH load and the speed of MS access to a cell.08 Number of slot spread transmission. A high value of MAXRETR will speed up the access and thus increase the RACH load.0 Version 30. After sending of the first HANDOVER ACCESS burst the MS waits to receive the PHYSICAL INFORMATION message from the BTS.03. range: default: Reference: 44 / 142 1-254 20 GSM 04. Maximum number of retransmissions. if a random access attempt on the current cell has still been unsuccessful after MAXRETR repetitions. range: default: Reference: ONE. After reception of the PHYS INFO the MS normally sets up the layer-2 connection on the new channel by transmitting an SABM message.

02 NFRAMEPG=6. range: default: Reference: 0-7 0 GSM 04.2000 Number of blocks for access grant.allows a mobile to determine whether the block contains paging messages or access grants. The channels are shared on a block by block basis and the information within each block . NFRAMEPG has an influence on the downlink signaling failure criterion which in turn is based on the ‘downlink signaling failure counter’ (DSC) in the MS.e. When DSC reaches 0 or a negative value. specifies the number of TDMA frames reserved for the Access Grant Channel (AGCH) during a period of 51 TDMA frames.08 GSM 05. a number of the available blocks in each 51-multiframe can be reserved for access grants only. On the other hand.e.> 0 if a SCBCH is created in the cell (see CREATE CHAN) Number of multiframes between paging. The paging group determines which CCCH blocks the MS shall monitor for incoming paging messages.0 NBLKACGR=1. This info is sent on the BCCH (SYS_INFO_Type3) in the IE ‘Control Channel Description’. To guarantee a basic network access to the MSs. This results in a reduction of the number of PCH-blocks. i.02 GSM 05. Eckardt Bertermann.≤ 2 if a BCBCH is created in the cell . DSC is initialized to a value equal to the nearest integer to 90/N where N is the NFRAMEPG parameter for that cell.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. defines the number of multiframes (51 TDMA frames) between two transmissions of the same paging message to mobiles of the same ‘paging group’ (The ‘paging group’ is used for ‘Discontinuos Reception (DRX)’ and is calculated from the IMSI and the used CCCH configuration. If the MS successfully decodes a message in its paging subchannel DSC is increased by 1 (however never beyond the nearest integer to 90/N) otherwise DSC is decreased by 4.when de-interleaved and decoded . if the value is too high (i. the paging queue in the BSS may run into overload. TAC3 SBS .08 GSM 05. Since in the average the number of MOCs is higher than the number MTCs it is useful to set NBLKACGR to the smallest value and leave the channel utilization to the system to avoid PCH shortages. Paging Channel (PCH) and AGCH share the same TDMA frame mapping when combined onto a basic physical channel. Moreover. range: default: Reference: 45 / 142 2-9 2 GSM 04. When the MS camps on a cell. but it is not allowed to use AGCH-blocks to transmit paging requests.03. Every PCH can be used by the system as AGCH. the time between two paging calls is long). one multiframe. By just monitoring a subset of the CCCH blocks for paging the MS can save battery capacity). This info is sent on the BCCH (SYS_INFO_Type3) in the IE ‘Control Channel Description’. Note: This parameter must be . If the value is too small an overload due to a shortage of PCHs could occur.08 Version 30. a downlink signaling failure is declared and cell reselection is performed.

If yes. The value of MTXPMAXCH should be adapted to the size of the radio cell: the smaller the cell the lower the allowed transmit power should be in order to minimize channel interference in adjacent cells and to save MS battery. the type of ASCI service is indicated. is able to communicate with the network also on the dedicated channel. MTXPMAXCH may be set to the same value as MSTXPMAX (SET BTS PKGBTSB) to guarantee that a MS.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. this parameter is relevant only for DCS 1800 cells. range: default: ASCIDISABLED.08 ASCISER=FALSE.08 GSM 05. VBSENABLED. ASCI service. TAC3 SBS .MAXRETR=ONE. 1-4 1 SET BTS PKGBTSC:NAME=bsc:0/bts:1. NOCHBLKN=1. This parameter is also used (together with other parameters) to define the path loss criterion C1 (see parameter CELLRESH in command SET BTS PKGBTSB).08 GSM 05. this attribute indicates the first block to be used for Notification Channel (NCH).0)) where A = <received level average> . this attribute indicates whether whether for the BTS Advanced Speech Call Items (ASCI) are enabled. 1-7 1 NOCHBLKN=1. NFRAMEPG=6. which is accepted on the RACH. 46 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann. unit: range: default: Reference: 2dB 0-3 0=feature disabled 0 GSM 04.) This info is sent on the BCCH (SYS_INFO_Type4) in the IE ‘SI 4 Rest Octets’. range: default: MS maximum transmit power for CCCH. It is also used by the MS in its calculation of C1 and C2 parameters: C1 = (A .RXLEVAMI Max (B.0)= MTXPMAXCH + PWROFS . (RXLEVAMI see SET BTS PKGBTSB.NY1=20.08 PWROFS=0. range: default: Version 30. MTXPMAXCH see SET BTS PKGBTSC. this attribute indicates the block number to be used for Notification Channel (NCH). It is used only by DCS1800 Class 3 Mobile Stations to add a power offset to the value of MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH (see MTXPMAXCH) used for its random access attempts.P Max (B.03.0 MTXPMAXCH=2. VGCSENABLED.0)= 0 P = Maximum RF output power of the MS (see table below). indicates the maximum transmit power level a MS is allowed to use when accessing a cell on the ‘random access channel’ (RACH) and before receiving the first ‘Power Command’ (see parameter MSTXPMAX in command SET BTS PKGBTSB) during a communication on a DCCH or TCH (after an IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT).NBLKACGR=1.PWROFS=0. Notification channel block number. Power Offset. This info is sent on the BCCH (SYS_INFO_Type3 and Type4) in the IE ‘Cell Selection Parameters’. range: default: Reference: 0-31 2 GSM 04. Note: Increasing the entered value decreases the allowed transmit power on the RACH and thus the maximum allowed distance between MS and BTS for RACH access! (For details regarding the power classes and power control levels please refer to the parameter MSTXPMAX (SET BTS PKGBTSB)).2000 Notification channel block number.ASCISER=ASCIDISABLED. In a first step.MSTXPMAXCH=2. VBS_VGCSENABLED ASCIDISABLED NOCHFBLK=1.Max(B.NSLOTST=15.NOCHFBLK=1.

31) and Interference threshold boundaries X (X= 1 to 5). TAC3 SBS .INTCLASS= FALSE. distributes the SACCH info over 4 bursts) over which values are averaged (value 1. Interference classification enabled.the intracell handover process will select the handover target channel on the basis of the measured idle TCH interference (i. In the RFRESIND messages the measured TCHs are assigned to so-called ‘interference classes’. the TCH with the best interference value will be selected first).SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.INTAVEPR=31-10-25-40-55-63. INTCLASS=FALSE. defines the number of SACCH multiframes (480ms = 4 multiframes.0 Version 30.03. FALSE FALSE INTAVEPR=31- 10-25-40-55. unit: range: default: Reference: 480ms=1 SACCH multifrm.08 Averaging period.e. range: default: TRUE.2000 Setting the cell attributes for the Interference Measurement of idle TCHs: < The parameters set with this command are used for averaging interference levels in idle traffic channels. Note: Only if this flag is set to TRUE . (averaging period) -1dBr (threhold boundaries) 1-31 (averaging period) 0-62 (threshold boundaries) 31 (averaging period) 10 (threshold boundary 1) 25 (threshold boundary 2) 40 (threshold boundary 3) 55 (threshold boundary 4) GSM 05. unit: range: default: RF resource indication period. > SET BTS PKGBTSI: NAME=BSC:0/bts:0. Range modified and threshold boundary 5 removed in BR5. the interleaving fct. 47 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann.. Object path name. RFRSINDP=60. these values set the limits of five interference bands for the idle time slots coded as binary presentation of -N dBr decimal values. An ‘interference class’ is represented by an interference band (limited by an upper and lower interference level) which is defined by the parameter INTAVEPR. defines the sending rate of the RFRESIND message towards the BSC 1 SACCH multiframe 1-254 60 SET BTS PKGBTSI:NAME=bsc:0/bts:1.0! RFRSINDP=60. . if this parameter is set to ENABLED the BTS permanently performs interference measurements on the idle traffic channels in the uplink and reports he measurement results in form of ‘RF resource indication (RFRESIND)’ messages via the Abis to the BSC.the PM scanners for idle TCH interference measurements (MEITCHIB) will deliver any results. The BSS maps the averaged measurements to these five bands.

a fixed value specified by GSM which depends on the control channel types: N200 (SDCCH)=23. sacchSDCCH.08 T3101: This timer is started. After reception of HANDOVER ACCESS bursts with a correct handover reference the BSS sends a PHYSICAL INFORMATION message to the MS and starts timer T3105. If this number is reached and T3105 expires again. If timer T3101 elapses before the main signaling link is established. 48 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann.03.0 Version 30. sdcch SAPI3) 10ms (for sacchTCHSAPI0. Parameter format: sdcchSAPI0 . units: range: default: Reference: MS10 = 10ms 0-255 MS10-8 GSM 04.06 T3101=HLFSEC-6. facchTCHH.08 T3105=MS10-8. Reception of a correctly decoded layer 2 leads to e reset of T3105. it repeats the PHYSICAL INFORMATION and restarts T3105. When the ‘Receive Ready’ (RR) from the MS is not received within T200 the transmission of the layer 2 frame is repeated and T200 restarted. which releases the associated resources. the BTS sends a CONNECTION FAILURE message with cause ‘Handover access failure' to the BSC which releases the new allocated channels and stops the context related to the handover.sdcchSAPI3 sacchTCHSAPI3.facchTCHF . LapDm Timer 200.2000 Setting the cell specific timer values: < This command sets the timers on layer 2 and 3 of the radio interface. facchTCHF.5 sec SEC5 = 5s 0-255 HLFSEC-6 GSM 04. TAC3 SBS . Principle: When the BTS transmits a layer-2 frame on the air the BTS starts the timer T200. if the maximum number of repetitions (NY1) has been reached: transmission of a CONN FAIL with cause ‘HO access failure’ and release of new channel. unit: range: default: reference: 5ms (for sdcchSAPI0. The total number of repetitions is restricted to N200.sacchSDCCH . N200(FACCH/FR)=34. N200(FACCH/HR)=29 If T200 expires after the last layer 2 frame repetition the BTS sends an ERROR INDICATION with cause ‘T200 expired N200+1 times’ (followed by a RELEASE INDICATION) message to the BSC. when a channel is allocated with an IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT message and stopped when the MS has correctly seized the channels. N200(SACCH)=5.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. The maximum number of repetitions is determined by the parameter NY1 (see command SET BTS PKGBTSC). Note: The MS can only receive the PHYSICAL INFO within a time frame determined by the MS timer T3124 (time to receive the PHYS INFO) which is fixed to 320ms.facchTCHH sacchTCHSAPI0 . the new allocated channel is released. sacchTCHSAPI3) 0-255 44 (sdcchSAPI0) 31 (facchTCHF) 41 (facchTCHH) 90 (sacchTCHSAPI0) 90 (sacchSDCCH) 90 (sdcchSAPI3) 135 (sacchTCHSAPI3) GSM 04. > SET BTS PKGBTST: NAME=BSC:0/bts:0. Object path name. T3105: The Timer T3105 is used for the repetition of PHYSICAL INFORMATION message during the handover procedure between non synchronized cells. units: range: default: Reference: MS100 = 100 ms HLFSEC = 0. If the timer expires before the BSS receives any correctly decoded layer 2 frame from the MS. this timer is used on different control channel types and determines the waiting time for a layer 2 frame acknowledgement. T3105 purpose: start: stop: period for repetition of PHYSICAL INFORMATION message sending of PHYSICAL INFORMATION message reception of a correctly decoded signaling or TCH frame on new channel from the MS expiry action: repetition of the PHYSICAL INFORMATION message. T200=44-31-41-90-90-90-135.

0 T3109=HLFSEC-24. after reception of the RR connection release). The BTSE starts this timer if 3 downlink TRAU frames have not been correctly received from the TRAU and it is reset if a correct frame is received again (It is only used if a BTSTRAU traffic connection is established). Note: If a CONNECTION FAILURE messages are received from the BTSE during an ongoing release procedure the PM counters count a TCH loss (NRFLTCH) although there is no real TCH loss. T3111: This timer is used to delay the signaling channel deactivation in the BSC after release of the main signaling link on the Um (i. If T3109 expires.TSYNC > ALARMT2 (see CREATE LICD) This setting is necessary in order to avoid call release before PCM alarm detection.08 TSYNC=1000. this timer is used by the BTSE to supervise time-out of TRAU frame handling. It is used to keep the signaling channel still available after the release for a certain amount of time (e. Rules: .08 T3111=HLFSEC-1. stops timer T3109 and starts timer T3111.2000 T3109: The purpose of T3109 is to release the channel in case of communication loss.TSYNC > T8 and TSYNC > T10 (for T8 and T10 see command SET BSC PKGBSCT) This setting is necessary to ensure that a signaling failure (T8 and T10) is detected before transcoder failure (TSYNC and TTRAU) Eckardt Bertermann. by the BSC after O&M intervention or radio link failure conditions. After reception of a CLEAR COMMAND message from the MSC or a detection of a lower layer failure the BSC sends a CHANNEL RELEASE message to the MS.e. TSYNC.03.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. TAC3 SBS .g. for switchback to the old cell in case of unsuccessful handover). it is rcommended to set T3109 to HLFSEC-8. If it expires.5 sec SEC5 = 5s 0-255 HLFSEC-24 GSM 04. . The timer is used during the channel release procedure initiated by the MSC for dedicated channel releases.5 sec SEC5 = 5s 0-255 HLFSEC-1 GSM 04. deactivates the SACCH and starts T3109. To avoid this. the BTSE reports a CONNECTION FAILURE INDICATION with cause ‘remote transcoder failure’ to the BSC and the connection is released. After reception of a DISCONNECT message from the MS the BSS confirms the release of the main signaling link towards the MS. Upon expiry of T3111 the BSS deactivates the channels (which are then available for other connections) and sends a CLEAR COMPLETE message to the MSC. units: range: default: Reference: MS100 = 100 ms HLFSEC = 0. unit: range: default: 49 / 142 10ms 10-10000 1000 (recommended value >200) Version 30. units: range: default: Reference: MS100 = 100 ms HLFSEC = 0. the BSC deactivates all channels for this MS. After confirmation by a DISC frame from the MS. the BSC resets T3109.

03.2000 TTRAU.0 TTRAU=1000. SDCCH assignment (i. When the BTSE receives the first downlink TRAU frame from the TRAU it stops TTRAU again. ENABLED DISABLED Version 30. For both features two time zones (representing daytime and nighttime traffic) can be defined. in which the activity of the cell respectively the TRX is observed within time zone specific observation periods (see parameters NCDP1 and NCDP2). the BSC observes the number of ESTABLISH INDICATION messages for SDCCH received from the observed BTS. disables the features ‘sleeping cell detection’ and ‘sleeping TRX detection’ for the affected BTS. the alarm ‘SLEEPING CELL’ is output.TTRAU > T8 and TTRAU > T10 (for T8 and T10 see command SET BSC PKGBSCT) This setting is necessary to ensure that a signaling failure (T8 and T10) is detected before transcoder failure (TSYNC and TTRAU) Enable ’No call in TRX/cell detection’. If TTRAU expires. 1)The feature ‘sleeping cell detection’ supervises the SDCCH activations within the cell: If at the end of the observation period no successful SDCCH activation could be registered. this timer is used by the BTS to supervise time-out of TRAU datalink (traffic) at connection establishment or handover. this flag enables resp. Sleeping TRX Alarm active Sleeping TRX Alarm ceased TNC CHAN ACT ACK (TCH) EST IND (TCH) >= 8 TNC CHAN ACT ACK (TCH) EST IND (TCH) < 8 time zone 50 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. For this. TAC3 SBS . the SLEEPING TRX alarm is triggered. After reception of the CHANNEL ACTIVATION message the BTSE starts the timer TTRAU and starts sending uplink TRAU frames towards the TRAU. For this. the alarm ‘SLEEPING TRX’ is output. If for a certain TRX the difference between the number of CHAN ACT ACK messages and the number of EST IND messages is equal or greater than eight (8). range: default: DISABLED. Rules: . unit: range: default: 10ms 10-10000 1000 (recommended value >150) ENANCD=DISABLED. ESTIN for SDCCH received) TNC TNC TNC no SDCCH activity time zone 2)The feature ‘sleeping TRX detection’ supervises the SDCCH activations within the cell: If at the end of the observation period the TCH activation success rate is below a fixed threshold. Principle: Sleeping Cell Alarm active Sleeping Cell Alarm ceased = succ. the BTSE reports a CONNECTION FAILURE INDICATION with cause ‘remote transcoder failure’ to the BSC and the connection is released.TTRAU > ALARMT2 (see CREATE LICD) This setting is necessary in order to avoid call release before PCM alarm detection. For both alarms alarms the ceasing of the alarm can take place at the earliest at the end of the next observation period if in this period the alarm condition has ceased (successful activities).e. the BSC observes the number of CHANNEL ACTIVATION ACKNOWLEDGE messages for TCH and the number of ESTABLISH INDICATION messages for TCH. .

2000 Timer 1 for ’No call in TRX/cell detection’. H0-H23 TimerNoCall2: 1-432 NOTUSED TGRANT=4. Number of repetitions of VGS_UPLINK_GRANT. StartTime2 represents the beginning of the timeframe. unit: range: default: 10ms 10-10000 400 TSYNCUL=1000. TSYNC uplink. unit: range: default: 10ms 10-10000 400 Version 30. If TSYNCUL expires a CONNECTION FAILURE INDICATION with cause ‘Remote Transcoder Failure’ is sent to the BSC. VGRULF=2. used for HSCSD data calls only.TimerNoCall2 represents the observation period. ENANCD=DISABLED. this parameter is only relevant if the ASCI feature is enabled (see parameter ASCISER in PKGBTSC). this parameter allows to configure the first time-frame for the ‘sleeping TRX/cell detection’ procedure. T3105=MS10-8. Voice group uplink free.0. If TSYNCUL expires a CONNECTION FAILURE INDICATION with cause ‘Remote Transcoder Failure’ is sent to the BSC.T3109=HLFSEC-24.T3111=HLFSEC-1.TGRANT=4. procedure.TTRAU=400.NCDP1=H5-1. unit: range: default: 10ms 10-10000 400 TSYNCR=1000. range: default: 1-254 20 VGRULF=2. this parameter is only relevant if the ASCI feature is enabled (see parameter ASCISER in PKGBTSC). this timer starts if the control bit ‘uplink frame error’ (UFE) indicates an error and no error on the synchronization pattern is detected. TSYNC uplink.5 and has no function in BR5. This timer starts if the control bit ‘uplink frame error’ (UFE) indicates an error and no error on the synchronization pattern is detected.0. unit: range: default: 1 SACCH multiframe ? 1-254 4 NRPGRANT=20. It determines the number of repetitions of the VGCS_UPLINK_GRANT message during an uplink access procedure. this parameter is only relevant if the ASCI feature is enabled (see parameter ASCISER in PKGBTSC).NRPGRANT=20.T200=44-31-31-90-90-90-135.TNOCH=16.5 and has no function in BR5. It determines minimum repetition period for notification messages. It determines the time to pass between two consecutive repetitions of the VGCS_UPLINK_GRANT message during an uplink access procedure.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. format: unit: range: default: StartTime1-TimerNoCall 1 StartTime1: Time in ‘1h’ TimerNoCall1: Periods of 10min StartTime1: H0-H23 TimerNoCall1: 1-432 H5-1 NCDP2=NOTUSED. range: default: 1-254 2 TNOCH=4. TAC3 SBS . If TSYNCR expires the BTS starts sending data frames.NCDP2=NOTUSED.TSYNC=400.0. this parameter allows to configure the second time-frame for the ‘sleeping TRX/cell detection’ procedure. It determines the number of repetitions of the UPLINK_FREE message during an uplink access procedure. This parameter was prepared for BR5. TSYNC downlink.? Timer for notification channel. StartTime1 represents the beginning of the time-frame TimerNoCall1 represents the observation period.5 and has no function in BR5. This parameter was prepared for BR5.(NCDP1STARTTIME – NCDP2STARTTIME)) Timer grant. SET BTS PKGBTST:NAME=bsc:0/bts:1. unit: range: default: 1 SACCH multiframe ? 1-254 16 TSYNCDL=400. format: unit: range: default: StartTime2-TimerNoCall2 StartTime2: Time in ‘1h’ TimerNoCall2: Periods of 10min StartTime2: NOTUSED. used for HSCSD data calls only. this parameter is only relevant if the ASCI feature is enabled (see parameter ASCISER in PKGBTSC). 51 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann.03. Note: If NCDP2 is used the following rules must be applied: 1) NCDP2STARTTIME > NCDP1STARTTIME 2) NCDP2TIMER ≤ 6x (24 . The following condition must be fulfilled: NCDP1TIMER ≤ 6x (NCDP1STARTTIME – NCDP2STARTTIME) Timer 2 for ’No call in TRX/cell detection’. This parameter was prepared for BR5.T3101=HLFSEC-6.0 NCDP1=H5-1.

range: default: Reference: TRUE.08 the cell (except for class 10). due to sudden loss of a radio path in e.2.g. This info is sent on the BCCH (SYS_INFO_Type1. However.g.2000 Setting the cell specific optional features: < Most of the values are of boolean type and are broadcast to the MSs on the BCCH. if the access for a certain class is barred MSs with this class are not allowed to perform a RACH access in the affected cell. all SS7links locked or failed.: all TCHs locked.NA15.4. CELLBARR=FALSE.3 and 4) in the IE ‘RACH Control Parameters’. Notes: . the MSC which served the dropped call) to quickly recognize the old call context and to interconnect the new radio path to the existing connection before the call is terminated by the end users or by expiry of call supervision timers. > SET BTS PKGBTSO: NAME=BSC:0/bts:0.. . A low value of radio link time-out (see parameter RDLNKTO in command SET BTS PKGBTSB) increases the number of call reestablishments because a decrease of RDLNKTO leads to an earlier declaration of radio link failures.3 and 4) in the IE ‘RACH Control Parameters’. With a call re-establishment procedure the MS tries to set up a new radio connection to the BSS directly after a call drop (which might have occured e.08.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. These conditions could be e.A cell can be set to 'barred' by the BSC automatically if certain conditions are fulfilled.If a cell is declared ‘barred’ in the SYS_INFO. FALSE FALSE GSM 04. classes default: ALLALLOWED 11-15 are priorized subscr.0 Version 30.5. 52 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann. This info is sent on the BCCH GSM 02. 1-9 are ordinary subscr.NA9. the MS sends a CM REESTABLISHMENT REQUEST (instead of a CM SERVICE REQUEST) to the network. This info is sent on the BCCH (SYS_INFO_Type1.. Object path name. For this. Cell barred.) can be explicitely barred for access to Reference: GSM 04. The access control class bit has no impact on the camping of an MS on the cell. all SDCCHs locked. It is then a task of the 'anchor' MSC (i. indicates whether the MS may try to start a Call re-establishment procedure. in case of RACH overload it is recommended to decrease the value of the parameter MAXRETR (see SET BTS PKGBTSC) first before access classes are barred. However. Whether a call reestablishment can be attempted or not depends on the call control state. Existing calls are continued and handovers to this cell are still possible.2.08 Call re-establishment allowed. NA11. NALLWACC=ALLALLOWED. the MS might set up the new call in a different BTS. section 5. class 10 is a mobile emergency call..e.11 (SYS_INFO_Type1. Setting the first value to 128 means: all access classes allowed. 04.03.08 CREALL=NOTALLOWED range: default: Reference: ALLOWED.2. ‘Barred’ only means that no access to the cell is allowed via the RACH. as described in GSM Rec. a tunnel). this does not mean that the cell is completely out of service. TAC3 SBS . with this parameter the access classes 1 to 15 (the access class is stored on the SIM-card: classes range: NA0.08 GSM 05. Not-allowed access classes. NOTALLOWED NOTALLOWED GSM 04. Depending on the radio conditions. the value TRUE indicates that the cell is barred and camping or any other access to the cell is forbidden.g. Inhibiting call reestablishment is a possibility to reduce the traffic load in the cell since call reestablishment causes considerable signaling load on the network.3 and 4) in the IE ‘RACH Control Parameters’.

03. range: default: Reference: TRUE. it is permanently set to FALSE. shall for Half Rate TCHs) This info is sent on the BCCH (SYS_INFO_Type3) and on the SACCH (SYS_INFO_Type6) in the IE ‘Cell Options’. e. FALSE FALSE Value is fixed to FALSE in BR5. (MS shall use DTX for FR TCHs. this parameter determines whether emergency calls are allowed to all MSs or restricted to MSs belonging to access classes in the range 11 to 15 .0 EC=FALSE. Note: DTXDL is not allowed on the BCCH TRX.08 GSM 06. Replaced by DTXDLFR in BR5. (MS shall not use DTX for FR TCHs. shall for HR TCHs). shall not for HR TCHs).08 GSM 05.2. range: default: TRUE. i. Meaning of the possible values: MAYFSHNH SHLFSHNH SHNFSHNH MAYFMAYH SHLFSHLH SHNFSHLN (MS may use DTX for FR TCHs. SHLFSHLH.0 Discontinuous transmission downlink for FR calls enabled.31 DTXDLHR=FALSE. SHNFSHLH. This info is sent on the (SYS_INFO_Type1. moreover. For operation DTX downlink must also be activated in the MSC. it helps to keep the overall radio interference on a low level. This parameter was prepared for BR5. range: MAYFSHNH SHLFSHNH SHNFSHNH MAYFMAYH SHLFSHLH SHNFSHLN default: SHLFSHNH Reference: GSM 04.0 it cannot be set to MAYFMAYH.2000 Emergency call restricted. 53 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann. Discontinuous transmission uplink enabled. parameter ‘Emergency Call allowed’. This attribute was prepared in advance for BR5. specifies whether discontinuous transmission (DTX) shall be used by the MS.0! Version 30. This feature is mainly used to save battery capacity in the MS.3 and 4) in the IE ‘RACH Control Parameters’. specifies whether ‘discontinuous transmission (DTX)’ (explanation see DTXUL) is enabled for FR calls in the BTS. shall not for HR TCHs). the MSC must declare DTX downlink ‘allowed’ in the DTX DL FLAG in the ASSIGNMENT REQUEST resp.31 Range modified in BR5.g. range: default: Reference: TRUE.08 GSM 05.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.0. FALSE FALSE GSM 04. specifies whether ‘discontinuous transmission (DTX)’ (explanation see DTXUL) is enabled for HR calls in the BTS.08 GSM 02. TAC3 SBS . FALSE FALSE GSM 04. Discontinuous transmission is a mode of operation in which the transmitters turn down the sending power if the frames do not contain user information. For further details see parameter DTXDLFR. HANDOVER REQUEST messages. (MS shall use DTX for FR TCHs.08 GSM 06.5: in BR5. i. (MS may use DTX for FR TCHs. The value ’TRUE’ indicates that emergency calls are restricted. may use for HR TCHs). shall not for HR TCHs). (MS shall not use DTX for Full Rate TCHs.11 DTXDL DTXDLFR=FALSE. The status of DTX downlink (applied/not applied) can be seen from the IE ‘Channel Mode’ in the CHANNEL ACTIVATION message on the Abis.e.e.0! DTXUL=1.5 and has no function in BR5. during speech pauses. Discontinuous transmission downlink for HR calls enabled.

The ‘IMSI attach’ message is a LOCATION UPDATE REQUEST’ message with the parameter ‘Location Update Type’ set to ‘IMSI Attach’. DB5 default: DB5 fixed value for BS10/BS11: 3dB 54 / 142 Version 30.08 PWROUT=MDB10-MDB5DB6.2000 IMSI attach/detach enabled. The procedure is controlled by the timer T3212 in the Mobile Station. This timer must be set in consideration of the „Implicit Detach“ timer in the VLR (command in SIEMENS MSC: ENTR MOBTHR:IDETTIM=. In the case of difference between the stored LAI and the one received on the BCCH of the current serving cell. If an ‘IMSI Attach’ message is sent to the MSC the mobile subscriber is marked as ‘attached’ in the VLR. If this parameter is set to TRUE the MSs are requested by the above mentioned BCCH parameter to send an ‘IMSI Attach’ message when they are switched on respectively an ‘IMSI Detach’ message when they are switched off. FALSE FALSE GSM 04. range: default: Reference: TRUE.. 6 = 36 min GSM 04. When the MS is powered up the timer starts running from the value thus contained in memory. M8DB..08 T3212=6. parameter ‘Attach/detach allowed’. M8DB default: M10DB fixed value for BS10/BS11: -6dB reducedOutputPowerThreshold range: M10DB. Location update. i. This info is sent on the BCCH (SYS_INFO_Type3) in the IE ‘Control Channel Description’. periodic loc. The PA supervises its actual output power and compares it to the desired value. This timer is reset to 0 and started when a signaling activity has taken place on the radio path (e. Eckardt Bertermann. When the MS is powered down the current value of T3212 is kept in memory. Periodic location update is used to ensure the continuous update of subscriber data in the VLR even if the subscriber remains in the same location area. the MS may be set to ‘detached’ in the VLR even before it executes a Periodic Location Update. timer for periodic location update. If the setting is vice versa. this info is sent on the BCCH (SYS_INFO_Type3) in the IE ‘Control Channel Description’. TAC3 SBS . A recovery in the VLR normally leads to the loss of the subscriber data. T3212. MOC. The desired value. i. i. The IMSI attach procedure is only used if the IMSI was deactivated while the MS was in ‘idle updated’ state before switch-off and the stored Location Area Identification is the same as the one which is actually broadcast on the BCCH of the current serving cell when it is switched on again. On expiry the MS initiates a location updating.) according to the following Rule: T3212 < IDETTIM. the reference for the entered thresholds is the maximum output power of the PA (depending on the PA type) minus the power reduction (see parameter PWRRED (CREATE TRX)). IMSI Attach). unit: range: default: Reference: 1 decihour (6 min) 0-255 0 means ‘infinite timeout’. the VLR regards the mobile subscriber as ‘not reachable’ and rejects the call completion in case of MTC.. reducedOutputPowerThreshold = defines the PA output power level to initiate output of a warning.e. defines three power output thresholds: outputPowerFaultThreshold = defines the minimum output power level at the PA which results in an alarm output to the CCTRL. M6DB. Power output thresholds. outputPowerFaultThreshold range: M10DB. This means that the mobile subscriber is regarded as ‘reachable’ and paging is performed in case of an MTC.e. For the ‘IMSI Detach’ procedure the message IMSI DETACH INDICATION is used. paging is not performed in this case. excessiveOutputPowerThreshold = defines the power level when a major alarm is generated due to too high output power.03. If an ‘IMSI Detach’ message is sent to the MSC the mobile subscriber is marked as ‘detached’ in the VLR. a normal location updating procedure is invoked independently of the ‘attach’ flag indication. M4DB default: MDB6 fixed value for BS10/BS11: -4dB excessiveOutputPowerThreshold range: DB3.e.g. updating is used in the cell.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.0 IMSIATDT=TRUE.

range: default: reference: TRUE. determines the state and the threshold values for the minor. DISABLE 1-100 ENABLE-30 (minor) ENABLE-60 (major) ENABLE-90 (critical) EARCLM=FALSE.2000 Direct TCH assignment enabled. SYNHOP BBHOP Version 30.03. this parameter indicates whether the early classmark is enabled or disabled. The threshold values can only be assigned if the previous attribute is set to ENABLE. major and critical QOS alarms for the signaling channels on the PCMB link. Eckardt Bertermann. FALSE FALSE GSM 04. Note: This parameter must be skipped if the NETWTYPE (see SET BSC PKGBSCB) is different from GSMDCS! Hopping Mode.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. Enable early classmark sending. SDCCHMS NOSDCCHMS FALSE BMONTH=ENABLE-30ENABLE-60-ENABLE-90. range: default: FALSE. ‘Direct TCH Assignment’ means: assignment of a TCH without previous assignment of an SDCCH. Abis-interface monitoring thresholds. The ‘Controlled Early Classmark Sending’ option must be implemented e. Setting DIRTCHASS to SDCCHMS means that direct TCH assignment is enabled but disabled for the cause 'answer to paging any channel' of the CHANNEL REQUIRED message (since SDCCHonly MS may be supported by the network).0 DIRTCHASS=FALSE. The threshold values can only be assigned if the previous attribute is set to ENABLE.g. The frequency hopping systems (see command CREATE FHSYID) have to be created accordingly.08 HOPMODE=BBHOP. Thus the flag simultaneously enables/disables the multiband handovers. range: default: ENABLE. DISABLE 1-100 ENABLE-30 (minor) ENABLE-60 (major) ENABLE-90 (critical) BSMONTH=ENABLE-30ENABLE-60-ENABLE-90. in mobiles that support multi-band mode or HSCSD (‘multislot capability’). TAC3 SBS .any channel' of the CHANNEL REQUIRED message (since SDCCHonly MS is not supported by the network). Note: If synthesizer frequency hopping is used (HOPMODE=SYNHOP) hopping is only allowed on channels belonging to non-BCCH TRXs. Abis-interface signaling channels monitoring thresholds. Early classmark sending means that the mobile station sends a CLASSMARK CHANGE message after the access to provide the network with additional classmark information. If ‘Direct TCH Assignment’ is enabled the TCH is first of all assigned by an IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT (not by ASSIGNMENT COMMAND!) and the FACCH associated to the TCH is used as main DCCH for the call setup control messages. Setting DIRTCHASS to NOSDCCHMS means that direct TCH assignment is enabled also for the cause 'answer to paging . major and critical QOS alarms on the PCMB link. When the setup phase of the call is completed the TCH is put into service by a CHANNEL MODE MODIFY message. range: default: 55 / 142 BBHOP. A MS which implements the ‘Controlled Early Classmark Sending’ option performs the early classmark sending if it receives the corresponding information on the BCCH (SYS_INFO_Type3) in the IE ‘SI 3 Rest Octets’. range: default: ENABLE. this parameter indicates whether baseband hopping or synthesizer hopping is to be used in this cell. determines the state and the threshold values for the minor.

HO requests) with cause ‘no radio resource available’ are sent to the MSC. The queuing feature is used to prevent an immediate rejection if an incoming TCH request (ASSIGNMENT REQUEST received in case of normal assignment or a HANDOVER REQUEST received in case of incoming MSCcontrolled handover) cannot be served due to TCH congestion.0 on. Every incoming TCH request contains a set of flags which determine whether a) ‘queuing’ and b) ‘preemption’ (for details see parameter EPRE below) is allowed for the TCH request. In these cases an ASSIGNMENT FAILURE message (for assignment requests) resp. The maximum length of the queue is determined by the parameter QL (see below). This parameter is only relevant if queueing (see parameter EQ) is enabled). Moreover. the maximum queuing time is restricted by administrable timers: for assignment requests the maximum queuing time is determined by the timer T11 (see BSCT11 in PKGBSCT) and for incoming MSC-controlled HO requests it is determined by the timer TQHO (see BSCTQHO in PKG BSCT). This attribute specifies the maximum number of TCH request that can be queued in the cell. incoming TCH requests for which queuing is allowed and which cannot be served via directed retry (see parameter ENFORCHO in PKG BSCB) are put in a queue and the MSC is informed about this process by the QUEUING INDICATION message.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.0 EQ=DISABLED.0 on. DISABLED DISABLED Note: This attribute is not new in the BR5. If TQHO expires in case of incoming MSC-controlled HO. Queued TCH requests can be discarded from the queue a) if further TCH requests with a higher priority are received or b) if (for the TCH assignment case) during the queuing time an SDCCH HO attempt fails. If queuing is enabled. QL=50. TAC3 SBS . incoming Inter-BSC directed retries are not queued. a HANDOVER FAILURE message (for inc.0 BSC database.0 it is actually used for the first time as the queuing feature is available from BR5. range: default: ENABLED. As a general rule. the TCH request is rejected with a HANDOVER FAILURE message using the same cause. 56 / 142 Version 30. Queue length.03. but in BR5.0 it is actually used for the first time as the queuing feature is available from BR5. If T11 expires. Attention: In case of MSC-controlled HO the Siemens MSC first attempts the HO REQ procedure for all target cells (previously received in the HO RQD message) with the ‘Queuing Allowed Indicator’ set to ‘not allowed’! Only if these attempts are not successful the MSC repeats the HO REQ procedure with the ‘Queuing Allowed Indicator’ set to ‘allowed’! This means that only for this second cycle queuing can be performed by the BSC. Note: This attribute is not new in the BR5. this parameter is used to enable/disable the ‘Queuing’ feature for TCH channels.2000 Eckardt Bertermann. but in BR5. range: default: 0-100 50 Enable queueing.0 BSC database. the BSC sends a CLEAR REQUEST message with cause ‘no radio resource available’ to the MSC and the requesting connection is released.

DIRTCHASS=FALSE. then 2. however.EARCLM=FALSE. If Preemption is allowed and an incoming highly priorized TCH request meets a TCH congestion in a cell.PWROUT=MDB10-MDB6-DB5.TIMEREPS=15. Note: Not all parameters of the command SET BTS PKGBTSO appear at this position when generated by the DBAEM. The ‘Priority’ IE contains the following entries: .2000 Enable Preemption.0 on.EQ=DISABLED.0 it is actually used for the first time as the queuing feature is available from BR5. If the forced HO procedure is not successful for the preempted low-priority call is forced released.EPRE=DISABLED.NUMREPS=5.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.CREALL=NOTALLOWED. The command reappears after the CREATE CHAN commands with the parameters SMSCBUSE and HOPP. If this is not the case the preempted (low-priority) call is immediately released. BMONTH=ENABLE-30-ENABLE-60-ENABLE-90. Directed Retry -> if not possible. 57 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann. This order is necessary to ensure that SMS Cell Broadcast and Frequency Hopping may already be enabled when the DB is loaded to the system.The Queuing Allowed Indicator (QAI) is used to decide on a per call basis if queuing may be applied or not. determines whether the feature ‘Preemption’ is enabled. SET BTS PKGBTSO:NAME=bsc:0/bts:1. range: default: ENABLED. A priority table which correlates the subscriber and event dependent priorities and the associated parameter settings for the ‘Priority’ IE is maintained in the MSC. The basic (simplified!) sequence of decision for incoming TCH requests is 1. NALLWACC=ALLALLOWED.HOPMODE=BBHOP. Preemption -> if not possible. Priority Level 1 being the highest value.DTXDL=FALSE. TAC3 SBS .QL=50.0 BSC database. Version 30.DTXUL=1. DISABLED DISABLED Note: This attribute is not new in the BR5.The Preemptive Vulnerability Indicator (PVI) applies for the entire duration of a connection and indicates whether the connection may become a target of preemption.The Priority Level (PL) is subdivided in 14 different levels. Queuing Note: The forced handover due to preemption is only attempted if the flag ENFORCHO (SET BSC PKGBSCB) is set to ENABLE. then 3. IMSIATDT=TRUE. . The combination of these parameters determines whether an incoming TCH request may lead to a forced HO of an existing lowpriority call for TCH resource provision for high-priorized TCH requests.0 EPRE=DISABLED.EC=FALSE. T3212=10. .CELLBARR=FALSE. existing calls with a lower priority are handed over to a suitable neighbour cell by a forced HO procedure with cause ‘preemption’. In GSM different priorities and access types are supported via the ‘Priority’ IE which is (optionally) conveyed in the ASS REQ and HO REQ message.03.BSMONTH=ENABLE-30-ENABLE-60-ENABLE90. can only be enabled if the CHAN objects are created accordingly (parameters FHSYID for frequency hopping and CHANTYPE for SMS-CB).The Preemptive Capability Indicator (PCI) applies to the allocation of resources for an event and indicates if the event is able to trigger the preemption of radio resources. but in BR5. Frequency Hopping and SMS-CB. .

Handover Thresholds and Handover in Connection with Power Control! SET HAND PKGHANDB: NAME=BSC:0/hand:0. section Handover Algorithms. range: default: 58 / 142 TRUE. If this is the case. Internal inter-cell Handover enabled.If an extended cell (PKGBTSB:CELLTYPE=EXTCELL) is the target of an inter-cell HO the handover will always take place to a ’double’ timeslot first as the BTS can only determine the actual MS-BTS distance when the first MS messages are received. These Intra-cell handovers are independent of the status of RXQUALHO.) in the scope of the intra-cell HO limitation functions set (see parameter ELIMITCH). range: default: TRUE.0 Version 30. Notes: . If the MS-BTS distance turns out to be short enough for a ’single’ timeslot an intracell handover from far to near (’double-to-single’) is executed immediately (if enabled). Eckardt Bertermann. FALSE FALSE LOTERCH=TRUE. If INTRACH is set to FALSE the quality conditions which normally cause an intra-cell ‘quality’ handover in the first place directly lead to an inter-cell ‘quality’ handover (provided that RXQUALHO is set to TRUE). FALSE FALSE Internal intra-cell Handover enabled. They determine which kind of inter-cell Handover is actually allowed. which only refers to inter-cell handovers. PBGTHO and ININHO are relevant.03. DISTHO.In a concentric cell (PKGBTSB:CONCELL=TRUE) the intracell handover (quality) may only take place within the complete area or within the inner area! . under defined quality and level conditions (see section handover algorithms) the handover algorithm always executes intra-cell ‘quality’ handovers before Inter-cell ‘quality’ handovers are attempted. determines whether intra-cell handovers due to quality shall be allowed this BTS. .For HSCSD calls the intracell HO due to quality is not performed. Notes: . Note: The setting of this parameter has an impact on performance measurement: It must be set to TRUE to ensure the correct working of all counters related to inter-cell handover. RXLEVHO.The intracell handover selects the available TCHs cyclically or based on the idle TCH measurements (if SET BTS PKGBTSI: INTCLASS=TRUE. Local inter-cell Handover enabled.In an extended cell the intra-cell handover due to quality may only take place from double to double ts or from single to single ts (exception: if no single TCH is available. range: default: TRUE. . a double one is selected). Object path name. INTERCH=TRUE. determines whether inter-cell handovers are generally allowed for this BTS.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. FALSE FALSE INTRACH=TRUE. irrespective of the status of the INTRACH flag.Only if this parameter is set to TRUE. determines whether inter-cell handover is controlled by the BSC (TRUE) or MSC (FALSE). TAC3 SBS .2000 Setting the cell specific parameters and threshold values for voice call Handover: F For detailed information regarding the Handover Thresholds please refer to the chapter Appendix. . the parameters RXQUALHO.

2000 Local intra-cell Handover enabled. range: default: Reference: 59 / 142 0-15 6 GSM 08.0 LOTRACH=TRUE.If the BTS object represents a concentric cell (PKGBTSB:CONCELL=TRUE) or an extended cell (PKGBTSB:CELLTYPE=EXTCELL) the setting of LOTRACH is ignored.see RxLevel HO . If the BSC does not execute the handover itself it sends the message HANDOVER REQUIRED towards the MSC. FALSE FALSE GSM 05. FALSE FALSE RXQUALHO=TRUE. Number of preferred cells. defines the number of preferred cells in the HANDOVER CONDITION INDICATION message. FALSE FALSE GSM 05. FALSE FALSE GSM 05. RxLevel Handover enabled. Distance Handover enabled. determines whether handover due to bad receive quality on uplink or downlink is enabled. range: default: TRUE.08 RXLEVHO=TRUE. Power budget handover means: handover to another cell if this cell offers a higher transmission level (irrespective of whether the power level of the actual cell is above the minimum . The intracell handover (quality) is in this case always controlled by the BSC! . Note: this flag only determines whether inter-cell handovers may be executed with cause ‘quality’. FALSE FALSE GSM 05. range: default: Reference: TRUE. Note: this flag only determines whether inter-cell handovers may be executed with cause ‘distance’.08 PBGTHO=TRUE.03. This message is a result of the handover measurement preprocessing function in the BTS and is sent periodically from the BTS towards the BSC (see parameter THORQST).08 NCELL=6. Power Budget Handover enabled. range: default: Reference: TRUE. determines whether handover due to long distance between MS and BTS is enabled. determines whether handover due to power budget is enabled.08 (for HANDOVER REQUIRED) Version 30. If the receive level is below the minimum threshold handover is necessary.08 DISTHO=TRUE. range: default: Reference: TRUE.or not. Note: this flag only determines whether inter-cell handovers may be executed with cause ‘level’. Bad receive Quality is determined by error rate measurements in the MS and the BTS.if yes which neighbour cells are suitable target cells. Notes: . Note: this flag only determines whether inter-cell handovers may be executed with cause ‘better cell’. range: default: Reference: TRUE.).If LOTRACH is set to false the BSC automatically adds the serving cell to neighbour cell description IE in the SYS_INFO_TYPE5 For a correct working of performance measurement counters for intracell handovers LOTRACH must be set to TRUE! RxQual Handover enabled. determines whether intra-cell handover is controlled by the BSC (TRUE) or MSC (FALSE).SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. determines whether handover due to low receive level on uplink or downlink is enabled. The handover measurement preprocessing function evaluates the measurement reports received from the MS in order to determine whether a handover is necessary and . Eckardt Bertermann. TAC3 SBS . These cells are then inserted into the target cell list of the HCI.

this averaging is done during power budget evaluation. parameter BSCT7).SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. If the BSC cannot execute the handover itself it sends a HANDOVER REQUIRED message towards the MSC. Like the HCI the HANDOVER REQUIRED message also contains a target cell list and a handover cause (e.) and is repeated under consideration of the timer T7 (see SET BSC PKGBSCT. Note: If THORQST is set to 0 then the HCI is repeated after every SACCH multiframe. every 480ms.0 THORQST=7. i.transaction has ended. Parameter structure: averaging period (in SACCH periods) . The distance between BTS and MS is determined from the ‘timing advance value’ which is determined from the propagation time on the radio path. defines the averaging period and DTX weighting factor for the uplink and downlink signal quality measurements.DTX weighting factor.no furher HO_COND_INDs received from the BTS . unit: range: default: 1 SACCH multiframe (averaging period) 1-31 (averaging period) 1-3 (DTX weight. If the call remains on the same TCH this might lead to a 'toggling' of inter.03. ‘better cell’ etc. factor) 8 (averaging period) 2 (DTX weighting factor) HOAVDIST=8. unit: range: default: Reference: 2 SACCH multiframes 0-31 5 GSM 05. HOAVELEV=8-1. The DTX weighting factor determines how much more bursts with speech signals are to be weighted than bursts with comfort noise.DTX weighting factor. unit: range: default: 1 SACCH multiframe 1-31 8 HOAVPWRB=10. Handover averaging distance. TAC3 SBS .08 60 / 142 Handover averaging parameters for power level measurement.and intra-cell HCIs. defines the averaging window size (in SACCH periods) used for averaging of the downlink receive level of the neighbour cells and the downlink receive level plus power control correction factor of the serving cell. unit: 1 SACCH multiframe range: default: Reference: 1-31 10 GSM 05.reception of a HANDOVER COMMAND from the MSC stop: . Parameter structure: averaging period (in SACCH periods) .2000 Timer for Handover Request defines the minimum interval between HANDOVER CONDITION INDICATION messages (see parameter NCELL) related to the same connection.e. factor) 8 (averaging period) 1 (DTX weighting factor) HOAVQUAL=8-2. Handover averaging parameters for quality measurement. call cleared expiry action: repetition of the HO_COND_IND message is permitted Recommendation: THORQST (HAND) > T7 (PKGBSCT) > T_HO_REJ (MSC). The parameter HOAVDIST defines the averaging window size for timing advance values (the absolute MS-BTS distance is expressed in SACCH multiframes). THORQST purpose: Minimum time between two HO_COND_IND messages related to the same connection sending of HO_COND_IND message by the BTS start: . Eckardt Bertermann. ‘uplink quality’.g.08 Version 30. unit: range: default: 1 SACCH multiframe (averaging period) 1-31 (averaging period) 1-3 (DTX weight. The DTX weighting factor determines how much more bursts with speech signals are to be weighted than bursts with comfort noise. Handover averaging parameters for power budget.communication to MS is lost . defines the averaging period and DTX weighting factor for the uplink and downlink signal level measurements.

0 HOLTHLVDL=10.03. The actual threshold value (in dBm) is calculated as follows: Handover Threshold (dBm) = -110dBm + HOLTHLVUL . TAC3 SBS . defines the receive signal level threshold on the uplink for intra-cell handover decision. defines the receive signal level threshold on the uplink for inter-cell handover decision.4% to 12.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.4% 2 = 0.6% 4 = 1. range: 0-7 0 = less than 0. The following rule has to be considered: HOLTHQUDL (SET HAND) > LOWTQUAD (SET PWRC) > UPTQUAD (SET PWRC) Eckardt Bertermann.4% to 0. Handover lower threshold quality downlink..08 HOTDLINT=20. unit: range: default: Reference: 1 dB 0-63 0 = less than -110dBm 1 = -110dBm 2 = -109dBm .. The following rule has to be considered: HOLTHLVDL (SET HAND) < LOWTLEVD < [LOWTLEVD (SET PWRC) + 2∗PWRREDSS (SET PWRC)] < UPTLEVD (SET PWRC) Handover threshold level downlink intra.8% 3 = 0.2% to 0. Handover lower threshold level uplink. The actual threshold value (in dBm) is calculated as follows: Handover Threshold (dBm) = -110dBm + HOTDLINT . 62 = -48dBm 63 = greater than -48dBm 5 GSM 05..08 61 / 142 Version 30. 62 = -48dBm 63 = greater than -48dBm 20 GSM 05. 62 = -48dBm 63 = greater than -48dBm 10 GSM 05.4% 6 = 6... The following rule has to be considered: HOLTHLVUL (SET HAND) < LOWTLEVU < [LOWTLEVU (SET PWRC) + 2∗PWRREDSS (SET PWRC)] < UPTLEVU (SET PWRC) Handover threshold level uplink intra. The actual threshold value (in dBm) is calculated as follows: Handover Threshold (dBm) = -110dBm + HOLTHLVDL .8% default: 6 Reference: GSM 05. defines the receive signal quality threshold on the downlink for inter-cell handover decision.2% 1 = 0. unit: range: 1 dB 0-63 0 = less than -110dBm 1 = -110dBm 2 = -109dBm . defines the receive signal level threshold on the downlink for intra-cell handover decision.2% to 6..2000 Handover lower threshold level downlink.08 HOLTHLVUL=5..2% 5 = 3.6% to 3. unit: range: default: Reference: 1 dB 0-63 0 = less than -110dBm 1 = -110dBm 2 = -109dBm . The actual threshold value (in dBm) is calculated as follows: Handover Threshold (dBm) = -110dBm + HOTULINT . 62 = -48dBm 63 = greater than -48dBm default: 20 Reference: GSM 05. defines the receive signal level threshold on the downlink for inter-cell handover decision.8% to 1. unit: range: default: Reference: 1 dB 0-63 0 = less than -110dBm 1 = -110dBm 2 = -109dBm ..08 HOLTHQUDL=6.08 HOTULINT=20.8% 7 = greater than 12.

2% to 6.8% 3 = 0. used for micro-/umbrella-cell configurations.0 HOLTHQUUL=6.03. Rule: HOTMSRM (HAND) < EXCDIST (PKGBTSO) Dynamic power budget handover. HOMDOFF and HOMSOFF (see command SET ADJC).8% default: 6 Reference: GSM 05. this flag indicates whether the ranking of target cells based on the priority layers enabled or disabled. TRUE.) Speed sensitive handover is e. range: default: TRUE.08 HOTMSRM=35 unit: 1km range: 0-35 default: 35 Reference: GSM 05. defines the threshold for the maximum permitted distance between MS and the BTS in 1km step size. It is. The following rule has to be considered: HOLTHQUUL (SET HAND) > LOWTQUAU (SET PWRC) > UPTQUAU (SET PWRC) Handover threshold MS range maximum. If the determined distance exceeds the entered threshold value an inter-cell handover with cause ‘distance’ is initiated. if hierarchical cell handover is enabled (HIERC=TRUE) this parameter determines the priority layer of the own cell. If the handover conditions are still present when the timer exspires the handover is executed. TAC3 SBS . range: default: 62 / 142 Handover lower threshold quality uplink. This flag is only relevant if power budget handover is enabled (PBGTHO=TRUE. however.4% 6 = 6.4% to 0. The priority layers of the neighbour cells are administered in the ADJC object (see CREATE ADJC). FALSE FALSE HIERC=FALSE.6% 4 = 1.8% to 1. HOMDTIME.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. FALSE FALSE PL=0. This priority is only evaluated for the Power Budget handover decision.2000 0-15 0 Priority layer.4% to 12.6% to 3. The timer is administered with the parameter HOMDTIME (SET ADJC).08 DPBGTHO=FALSE. The BTS calculates the distance between MS and BTS from the delay of the RACH burst which is used for the CHANNEL REQUEST and the HANDOVER ACCESS.2% 5 = 3.g. An umbrella cell covers the same area as a number of microcells and is normally used as handover target cell in case of microcell congestion or for MSs which move very fast. range: default: Version 30. In case of an extended cell (CELLTYPE=EXTCELL in PKGBTSB) the handover threshold MS range maximum is determined by the parameter HOTMSRME (HAND). Hierarchical Cell Handover.2% 1 = 0.2% to 0.8% 7 = greater than 12.4% 2 = 0. For this reason the power budget handover to a microcell is delayed by a special timer (the microcell is ‘penalized’ as long as the timer runs). Eckardt Bertermann. The parameters relevant for the administration of speed sensitive handover are: MICROCELL. only in effect for a certain neighbour cell if the parameter MICROCELL is also set to TRUE in addition. Speed sensitive handover shall allow power budget handovers to a microcell if an MS moves slow but shall prohibit them if the MS moves fast in order to avoid unnecessary signaling load due to repeated handovers (if the MS moves fast it may have left the microcell already when the handover is actually excuted). this parameter determines whether ‘dynamic power budget’ handover or ‘speed sensitive handover’ is active. defines the receive signal quality threshold on the uplink for inter-cell handover decision. range: 0-7 0 = less than 0.

HO_MARGIN(n) > 0 .HO_MARGIN(n) ≤ 0.2000 Hierarchical cell ranking flag.HO_MARGIN(n).new calls are set up in the inner area or a handover from complete to inner area is executed if the level conditions defined by the parameter HORXLVDLO are fulfilled and if the MS-BTS distance is smaller than the distance limit according to the principles explained for the parameter HOCCDIST (For HORXLVDLI. These ranking methods are only relevant for imperative handovers (i.Pa) + levelOffsetNcell.0 HIERF=RANK0. FALSE FALSE Version 30.Pa) are subdivided into two sublists: The upper sublist consits of all neighbour cells where RXLEV_NCELL(n) > RXLEVMIN(n) + Max(0. . Possible values: Rank0 (Ranking Method 0): All adjc.Pa) are subdivided into two sublists: The upper sublist consits of all neighbour cells where PBGT(n) . this flag determines whether in the concentric cell the distance should also be taken into account for the intracell handover decision and for the channel assignment decision during call setup.03. see parameter ENFORCHO (SET BSC PKGBSCB)). the lower sublist consists of all neighbour cells where RXLEV_NCELL(n) ≤ RXLEVMIN(n) + Max(0. the lower sublist consists of all neighbour cells where PBGT(n) . For further details please refer to the section ‘Handover Thresholds & Algorithms’. level.e.Pa) + levelOffsetNcell.cells where RXLEV_NCELL(n) > RXLEVMIN(n) + Max(0. Within each sublist the cells are sorted in increasing order of priority Neighbour cells with the same priority are sorted by PBGT(n) . quality and distance) and forced handover (directed retry. rank1 rank0 CCDIST=FALSE. TAC3 SBS . range: default: 63 / 142 TRUE.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.cells where RXLEV_NCELL(n) > RXLEVMIN(n) + Max(0. Note: If CCDIST is set to TRUE then . HORXLVDLO and HOCCDIST see below). Enable concentric cell distance handover. range: default: rank0. Eckardt Bertermann. this parameter is used to switch between two different ranking methods. Within each sublist the cells are sorted in increasing order of priority Neighbour cells with the same priority are sorted by PBGT(n) .new calls are set up in the complete area or a handover from inner to complete area is executed if the level conditions defined by the parameters HORXLVDLO (for call setup) and HORXLVDLI (for handover) are fulfilled or if the MS-BTS distance exceeds the distance limit according to the principles explained for the parameter HOCCDIST. Rank1 (Ranking Method 1): All adjc. The term ‘levelOffsetNcell’ represents the parameter LEVONC (CREATE ADJC).HO_MARGIN(n).

If RXLEV_DL < HORXLVDLO the call is set up in the complete area.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.HORXLVDLI > (PWRREDinner .. unit: range: default: 1 dB 0-63 0 = less than -110dBm 1 = -110dBm 2 = -109dBm . TAC3 SBS . If RXLEV_DL > HORXLVDLO the call is set up in the inner area. 62 = -48dBm 63 = greater than -48dBm 26 HORXLVDLO=32.. The decision is made on the basis of HORXLVDLO and HOCCDIST (see parameter CCDIST!).2000 RXLEV threshold downlink inner. Rule: To avoid ’ping pong’ handovers between inner and complete area the following rule must be followed: HORXLVDLO . RXLEV threshold downlink outer. Eckardt Bertermann.03. unit: range: default: 64 / 142 1 dB 0-63 0 = less than -110dBm 1 = -110dBm 2 = -109dBm . Call Setup: During the call setup procedure the BSC sends the PREFERRED AREA REQUEST messge to the BTS to ask whether the TCH shall be assigned in the inner or complete area of the concentric cell.PWRREDcomplete) [dB] (for the parameter PWRRED see commend CREATE TRX). this parameter defines the downlink receive level threshold in the complete area of a concentric cell the transition of which causes a call setup in the inner area or an intracell handover from the complete area the inner area.0 HORXLVDLI=26.. The BTS responds with a PREFERRED AREA message stating which area is preferred. Rule: To avoid ’ping pong’ handovers between inner and complete area the following rule must be followed: HORXLVDLO . Intracell Handover: If the MS is served by the TRX of the inner area and RXLEV_DL < HORXLVDLI then the MS will be handed over to the complete area TRX. Intracell Handover: If the MS is served by the TRX of the complete area and RXLEV_DL > HORXLVDLO then the MS will be handed over to the inner area TRX. The decision is made on the basis of HORXLVDLI and HOCCDIST (see parameter CCDIST!).HORXLVDLI > (PWRREDinner .. this parameter defines the downlink receive level threshold in the inner area of a concentric cell the transition of which causes an intracell handover from the inner area the complete area.PWRREDcomplete) [dB] (for the parameter PWRRED see commend CREATE TRX). The decision is made on the basis of HORXLVDLO and HOCCDIST (see parameter CCDIST!). 62 = -48dBm 63 = greater than -48dBm 32 Version 30.

Rule: HOMSTAM (HAND) < HOTMSRME < EXCDIST (PKGBTSO) Eckardt Bertermann. . the call will be handed over to the complete area. The BTS responds with a PREFERRED AREA message stating which area is preferred.. range: default: TRUE. this parameter defines the cell belonging to the sectorized concentric cells to which an intercell handover from inner to inner area is possible. Please pay attention to the explanations for CCDIST (see above)! Inner-inner handover. this parameter is only relevant if the parameter CCDIST is set to TRUE (see above). CCELL=NOT_DEFINEDNOT_DEFINED. if the MS is already served by a TRX of the inner area. after that a complete-to-inner handover would follow. FALSE FALSE Version 30.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. TAC3 SBS . with ININHO=FALSE) the handover would be executed to the complete area of the colocated cell first. range: default: 0-119. It determines the distance limit used for the ’distance’ intracell handover decision within the concentric cell and for the channel assignment decision during call setup.If MS_BTS-distance > HOCCDIST+1 then new calls will be set up in the complete area or. the call will be handed over to the inner area. this parameter specifies the handover threshold range maximum (see HOTMSRM) for extended cells. sector 1 (own cell) sector 3 (colocated cell 2) inner area inner-to-inner handover complete area sector 2 (colocated cell 1) Under normal conditions (i. The ‘Colocated Cell' (for meaning of the term ‘colocated cell’ please see the previous parameter ININHO) of is represented by its BTS-no. The decision is made on the basis of HORXLVDLI. this flag determines whether an intercell handover from inner to inner area in sectorized concentric cells is enabled.0 HOCCDIST=5. NOT_DEFINED NOT_DEFINED HOTMSRME=100.03. The hysteresis ’+1’ is automatically applied to avoid handover oscillation if the MS moves very close to the defined distance limit.2000 Handover concentric cell distance limit. if the MS is already served by a TRX of the complete area.e. During the call setup procedure the BSC sends the PREFERRED AREA REQUEST messge to the BTS to ask whether the TCH shall be assigned in the inner or complete area of the concentric cell. HORXLVDLO and HOCCDIST (see above). If the BS-BTS distance exceeds this threshold an inter-cell handover due to distance is executed. unit: range: default: 65 / 142 1km 35-100 100 Colocated cell. Handover threshold MS range maximum extended.If MS_BTS-distance < HOCCDIST then new calls will be set up in the inner area or.Colocated cell 2. To avoid these unnecessary signaling transactions ININHO should be set to TRUE. unit: range: default: 1 km 0-35 5 ININHO=FALSE. Parameter format: Colocated cell 1 . .

If the MS-BTS distance determined during call setup is below this threshold the call is set up on a ’single’ timeslot . It enables a mechanism which prevents unlimited handover repetitions to a target cells if previously handovers to this cell have not been successful. range: default: TRUE. the BTS excludes the affected cell from the target cell list of the HANDOVER CONDITION INDICATION messages for an administrable period of time (see parameter TINHFAIHO (CREATE ADJC)).An extended cell handover from near to far (singleTS-to-doubleTS) is executed if MS-BTS distance = HOMSTAM . unit: range: default: 1km 0-34 4 NOBAKHO=FALSE.2000 Threshold for the maximum MS distance. unit: range: default: 1km 0-34 32 HOMRGTA=4. this flag determines whether the feature ’Prevention of handover failures repetition’ is enabled or not. due to reception of a HANDOVER REQUIRED REJECT message). Rule: HOMSTAM < HOTMSRME (HAND) < EXCDIST (PKGBTSO) Handover margin for timing advance. range: default: 66 / 142 1-15 4 Version 30.An extended cell handover from far to near (doubleTS-to-singleTS) is executed if MS-BTS distance = HOMSTAM-HOMRGTA No back handover.0 HOMSTAM=32. It enables a mechanism that prevents a back-handovers due to power budget if the TCH in the serving cell was seized by an imperative handover procedure (handover due to level. FALSE FALSE MAXFAILHO=4. If the flag NOBAKHO is set to TRUE the back-handovers are prevented by the following mechanism: if an imperative handover is performed the BSC extends the CHANNEL ACTIVATION message for the ’new’ TCH in the target cell by the IE ’Cell List Preferred’ which contains the CGI of the handover origin cell and by a GSM 08. It is applied to the MS-BTS distance threshold for the maximum MS distance (see parameter HOMSTAM) in the following way: . FALSE FALSE NOFREPHO=FALSE. quality or distance). If the flag NOFREPHO is set to TRUE every unsuccessful handover leads to the incrementation of a counter in the BSC. If this counter reaches an administrable threshold (see parameter MAXFAILHO) the BSC sends a HANDOVER FAILURE INDICATION message to the BTS which contains the CGI of the target cell to which the handover attempts failed. No handover failures repetition. Maximum number of failed handovers.03. A handover is regarded as unsuccessful if the MS returns to the old channel with a HANDOVER FAILURE message or if in case of an external handover the timer T7 expires (e. The threshold HOMSTAM is also used for handover decisions for extended cell handovers (see parameter EXTCHO (SET HAND)). Eckardt Bertermann.g. range: default: TRUE. this parameter specifies the timing advance margin for the extended cell handover. This message makes the BTS suppress the handover origin cell in all following INTERCELL HANDOVER CONDITION INDICATION messages sent with the cause ’better cell’ for an administrable time period (see parameter TINHBAKHO (CREATE ADJC)). this parameter specifies the maximum allowed MS-BTS distance for the use of a ’not extended’ radio channel (see parameter EXTMODE (CREATE CHAN)). To avoid ping-pong handovers an additional margin (see parameter HOMRGTA) is applied to this threshold. As a result. this parameter is only relevant if the parameter NOFREPHO is set to TRUE and determines the maximum number of consecutive failures of intra BSC handovers that are permitted in the same BTS for a single connection.if it is above the threshold the call is set up on a ’extended’ timeslot (see parameter EXTMODE (CREATE CHAN)). TAC3 SBS .SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.08 cause IE with the cause ’distance’. this flag determines whether the feature ’Prevention of Back handovers’ is enabled or not.

08. In cells with good level but high interference. Eckardt Bertermann. Timer for ’no intra-cell handover’. especially if frequency hopping is used.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.g. this flag determines whether the feature ’Limitation of Intracell handover repetition is enabled or not. If the counter reaches an administrable threshold (see parameter MAIRACHO).0 ELIMITCH=FALSE. considering the interference levels determined by the Idle TCH Supervision (if activated. If in this period a suitable neighbour cell is found an inter-cell handover is attempted. It specifies the timer used by the BTS to indicate how long no quality intra-cell handover is allowed for a specific connection in the cell if MAIRACHO+1 successful intra-cell handovers have taken place. this parameter is only considered if the flag ELIMITCH is set to TRUE. a counter implemented in the BSC is increased on every successful intra-cell HO completion. It enables a mechanism that prevents an unlimited repetition of quality intra-cell handovers which might easily happen in the current implementation: if the flag is set to FALSE the intra-cell handovers due to quality cyclically select all idle TCHs. range: default: TRUE.03. Maximum number of intra-cell handovers. If the flag ELIMITCH is set to TRUE. the next CHAN ACT message the BSC sends for an intra-cell handover contains the GSM08. This message leads to the start of an administrable timer (see parameter TINOIERCHO) in the BTS which suppresses the generation of further INTRA CELL HCI messages as long as the timer runs. Note: This feature does only work if the quality intra-cell HO is controlled by the BSC (LOTRACH=TRUE). unit: range: default: 67 / 142 1s 1-254 60 Version 30.2000 Enable limitation of intra-cell handovers. The only event that can stop this timer is the release of the call context (e. call release or inter-cell handover). The timer is started in the BTS on reception of the adapted CHANNEL ACTIVATION message which contains an additional GSM 08. see command SET BTS PKGBTSI) without ever triggering an inter-cell HO unless one of the intra-cell HOs is not successful. Due to the feature implementation actually the maximum allowed number of consecutive successful intra-cell handovers is MAIRACHO+1. this parameter is only considered if the flag ELIMITCH is set to TRUE. FALSE FALSE MAIRACHO=10. however. range: default: 1-15 10 TINOIERCHO=60.08 cause ’handover successful’. TAC3 SBS . It determines the maximum number of consecutive successful intra-cell handovers that are permitted in the same BTS for a single connection. an inter-cell handover is desired if intra-cell handovers do not lead to better radio conditions. cause ’handover successful’.

i.HOLTHLVUL=5.NOFREPHO=FALSE.HORXLVDLO=32.HOLTHQUUL=6.HOAVPWRB=10.HOLTHQUDL=6. Enabling Extended Cell Handover.HOMRGTA=4.TINOIERCHO=60.HOAVDIST=8.03. This parameter was prepared for BR5.ININHO=FALSE. it is permanently set to FALSE.IERCHOSDCCH=FALSE.INTERCH=TRUE. LOTRACH=TRUE.MAXFAILHO=4. HOCCDIST=5. 68 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann. i.CCELL=NOT_DEFINED-NOT_DEFINED.DISTHO=TRUE. Note: Not all parameters of the command SET HAND appear at this position when generated by the DBAEM. range: TRUE.e.RXLEVHO=TRUE.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. This order is necessary to ensure that Extended Cell Handover may already be enabled when the DB is loaded to the system. IRACHOSDCCH=FALSE. it is permanently set to FALSE. this parameter determines whether inter-cell handover for SDCCHs is enabled or not.PL=0. NCELL=6. TAC3 SBS . is only possible if the CHAN objects are created accordingly (parameter EXTMODE).INTRACH=TRUE.DPBGTHO=FALSE.HOAVQUAL=8-2. however. range: TRUE. This parameter was prepared for BR5. HOMSTAM=32.5 and has no function in BR5.2000 Inter-cell handover for SDCCH.e. HOTMSRME=35.0.NOBAKHO=FALSE.HOAVELEV=8-1.HORXLVDLI=26.5 and has no function in BR5.HIERC=FALSE. SET HAND:NAME=bsc:0/hand:1.RXQUALHO=TRUE. Intra-cell handover for SDCCH.HOTULINT=5. FALSE default: FALSE Value is fixed to FALSE in BR5.0 IERCHOSDCCH=FALSE.PBGTHO=TRUE. The command reappears after the CREATE CHAN commands with the parameters EXTCHO. HOLTHLVDL=10.HOTDLINT=20. this parameter determines whether intra-cell handover for SDCCHs is enabled or not. FALSE default: FALSE Value is fixed to FALSE in BR5. ELIMITCH=FALSE.0! Version 30.0! IRACHOSDCCH=FALSE.LOTERCH=TRUE.0.THORQST=3.HOTMSRME=100.MAIRACHO=10.

TINHFAIHO* Quality HO Level HO Distance HO Forced HO** Power Budget HO HANDB: RXQUALHO=TRUE HANDB: RXLEVHO=TRUE HANDB: DISTHO=TRUE HANDB: PGBTHO=TRUE HOAVQUAL HOLTHQUDL HOLTHQUUL HOAVELEV HOLTHLVDL HOLTHLVUL HOAVDIST HOTMSRM BSCB: ENFORCHO= ENABLE EISDCCHHO= ENABLE (inter-BSC DR) ADJC: HOM Extended Cell HANDB: HOTMSRME HOAVPWRB ADJC: FHORLMO Speed Sens. MSTXPMAXCL. MAXFAILHO* ADJC: BCCHFREQ. *** Parameters for prevention of back-HO in the HANDB and ADJC objects are set from point of view of the 69 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. RXLEVMIN. NOFREPHO*. CCELL * ** not relevant for Directed Retry Forced Handover consists of ‘Directed Retry’ and ‘Forced Handover due to Preemption’. TAC3 SBS . HO HANDB: DPBGTHO=TRUE Prev.0 Version 30.03. THORQST. of back (PBGT) HO *** Prevention of back (PBGT) HO *** HANDB: NOBAKH=TRUE ADJC: HOMSOFF HOMDTIME HOMDOFF MICROCELL ADJC: TIMERFHO ADJC: TINHBAKHO Hierarchical Cell Structure (HCS) HANDB: HIERC=TRUE HANDB: HIERF=RANK 0 HANDB: HIERF=RANK 1 ADJC: PLNC ADJC: PLNC LEVONC HCS HCS HANDB: HIERC=TRUE HANDB: HIERC=TRUE HANDB: PL HANDB: PL ADJC: PLNC PPLNC ADJC: PLNC PPLNC Concentric Cells (sectorized) BTSB: CONCELL=TRUE HANDB: ININHO. CELLGLID. Both forced HO types are independent of the INTERCH flag.2000 Handover Parameter Relations Inter-cell handover Inter-Cell Handover HANDB: INTERCH=TRUE BSC/MSC control of inter-cell handover HANDB: LOTERCH=TRUE → BSC controlled * LOTERCH=FALSE → MSC controlled * Parameters relevant for all types of inter-cell HO HANDB: NCELL. BSIC.

** The setting of LOTRACH has no effect for concentric cells and for extended cells 70 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann.2000 Intra-cell handover Intra-Cell Handover Extended Cell HO (near to far / far to near) Concentric Cell HO (complete to inner / inner to complete) HANDB: EXTCHO=TRUE BTS: CONCELL=TRUE CHAN: EXMODE=TRUE (’double’ ts = far) EXMODE=FALSE (’single’ ts = near) TRX: TRXAREA PWRRED HANDB: HOMSTAM HOMRGTA HOAVDIST HANDB: HORXLVDLI HORXLVDLO HO decision also on distance criteria HANDB: CCDIST=TRUE HOCCDIST Intra-cell HO due to quality HANDB: INTRACH=TRUE * BSC/MSC control of intra-cell handover (quality) HANDB: LOTRACH=TRUE → BSC controlled LOTRACH=FALSE → MSC controlled ** HANDB: HOAVQUAL HOAVELEV HOLTHQUDL HOLTHQUUL HOTDLINT HOTULINT THORQST Limitation of intra-cell handover(quality) repetition HANDB: ELIMITCH=TRUE MAIRACHO TINOIERCHO * In a concentric cell the intra-cell handover due to quality only takes place within the inner or within the complete area. TAC3 SBS .0 Version 30.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. a double one is selected) For HSCSD calls no intra-cell handover due to quality is performed (independent of the state of the INTRACH flag). In an extended cell the intra-cell handover due to quality only takes place from double to double ts or from single to single ts (exception: if no single TCH is available.03.

6kbit/s or a downgrade (vice versa) is necessary for an ongoing data call. range: default: TRUE.RHOLTQUL and RUGRDL. this flag determines whether the quality evaluation for rate up-downgrading decision for 14.5.4kbit/s and 9.4Kbit/s to 9. For the threshold values for the up. this parameter specifies how many measurement samples are used in the gliding averaging process for rate up-downgrading for 14. It is not in effect for BR5.4kbit dataservices. SET HAND PKGHANDD: NAME=BSC:0/hand:0. If a downgrade does not lead to a sufficiently improved quality. RDGRUL. If the BTS recommends a rate downgrade and the data call is an HSCSD call. range: default: 71 / 142 4-32 8 Timer to inhibit rate upgrade. unit: range: default: 2 SACCH multiframes 2-100 5 RAVEW=10. the BTS uses the DL measurement reports and UL measurement reults to decide whether an upgrade from 14.0 and does not appear in the databases generated by DBAEM.6kbit/s and the next upgrade request.2000 Setting the cell specific parameters and threshold values for 14. Rate averaging window.or downgrade.4kbit dataservices is enabled or not. an intercell handover due to quality is initiated.and downgrading and quality inter-cell handover: < This command is used to set UL/DL quality thresholds for data speed up. FALSE FALSE TINHRUGR=10. Object path name. this parameter specifies the minimum time time between an upgrade to 14. RDGRDL. RHOLTQDL. Enable rate up-/downgrade. This decision is based exclusively on the UL/DL quality values determined for the serving TCHs.and downgrade respectively the inter-cell quality handover please see the parameters RUGRUL.03.4kbit/s to 9.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.4kbit/s and the next downgrade request. unit: range: default: 2 SACCH multiframes 2-100 10 TINHRUDR=10. the BSC will downgrade the data rate per TCH from 14. If the BTS decides that an up.6kbit/s and quality inter-cell handovers for ongoing data calls.4kbit/s data call up. Eckardt Bertermann. this parameter specifies the minimum time time between a downgrade to 9. If this feature is enabled.0 Version 30. Timer to inhibit rate downgrade. > Note: This command was prepared in advance for BR5.or downgrade is necessary it sends a MODE MODIFICATION INDICATION message to the BSC which in turn executes the up. ERUDGR=FALSE.6kbit/s but may decide to keep the user data rate by activating another TCH for the call.and downgrade between 14. TAC3 SBS .

range: default: 0-5 1 RUGRDL=10.2000 Rate upgrade threshold uplink. range: default: 2-7 3 RHOLTQDL=10.0 RUGRUL=10. this parameter specifies the downlink quality threshold for the downgrade (14.4 kbit/s).6 kbit/s -> 14. range: default: 72 / 142 2-7 3 Version 30.4 kbit/s).6kbit/s).6 kbit/s). this parameter specifies the uplink quality threshold for the upgrade (9. range: default: 1-6 2 RDGRDL=10.03. this parameter defines the receive signal quality threshold on the uplink for handover decision for data calls where the rate up/downgrading mechanism was applied. range: default: 1-6 2 RHOLTQUL=10. TAC3 SBS . To ensure a proper working of the decision algorithm the following rule has to be followed: RUGRDL < RDGRDL < RHOLTQDL Rate downgrade threshold uplink. To ensure a proper working of the decision algorithm the following rule has to be followed: RUGRUL < RDGRUL < RHOLTQUL Rate downgrade threshold downlink. To ensure a proper working of the decision algorithm the following rule has to be followed: RUGRDL < RDGRDL < RHOLTQDL Rate handover lower threshold quality uplink. this parameter defines the receive signal quality threshold on the downlink for handover decision for data calls where the rate up/downgrading mechanism was applied. To ensure a proper working of the decision algorithm the following rule has to be followed: RUGRUL < RDGRUL < RHOLTQUL Rate handover lower threshold quality downlink.4 kbit/s -> 9. this parameter specifies the uplink quality threshold for the downgrade (14.4 kbit/s -> 9. To ensure a proper working of the decision algorithm the following rule has to be followed: RUGRUL < RDGRUL < RHOLTQUL Rate upgrade threshold downlink.6 kbit/s -> 14. this parameter specifies the downlink quality threshold for the upgrade (9. range: default: 0-5 1 RDGRUL=10.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. To ensure a proper working of the decision algorithm the following rule has to be followed: RUGRDL < RDGRDL < RHOLTQDL Eckardt Bertermann.

range: default: Reference: TRUE. FALSE FALSE GSM 05. DB4. the BSC orders every MS in the concerned cell to use the maximum RF output power as defined by the parameter MSTXPMAX (PKG_BTSB) or by the MS power class whichever is the lower. unit: range: default: Reference: Power increase step size. FALSE FALSE GSM 05.bts-no. As long as this timer runs the BTS monitors requested transmission power.08 GSM 05. If MS power control is enabled the MS adjusts the power according to appropriate commands received from the BTS. unit: range: default: Reference: 73 / 142 Power reduction step size. Object path name.0 Version 30.08 PWRREDSS=DB2.20 EMSPWRC=TRUE. Enabling BS Power Control results in a minimization of the downlink interference on the radio interface.08 Power confirmation interval. determines whether the MS dynamically adjusts its sending power according to the current radio conditions. defines the step size used when reducing the MS transmit power. > NAME=BSC:0/pwrc:0. section Power Control Thresholds and Handover in Connection with Power Control! SET PWRC: < PWRC . BS power control enabled. Whether the sending power is to be increased or decreased is determined from the downlink measurement reports the MS sends to the BTS. DB6 DB4 GSM 05.08 GSM 05. determines whether the BTS dynamically adjusts its sending power according to the current radio conditions (on non-BCCH carriers).03. TAC3 SBS . 2dB DB2.2000 Setting the cell specific attributes for Power Control: F For detailed information regarding the Power Control thresholds please refer to the chapter Appendix. DB4 DB2 GSM 05. This info is sent on the BCCH (SYS_INFO_Type3) or on the SACCH (SYS_INFO_Type6) in the IE ‘Cell Options’. defines the maximum interval for confirmation of the new RF power level in units of 2 SACCH multiframes. If MS power control is disabled.08 PWRCONF=2. EBSPWRC=TRUE. MS Power Control is used to save MS battery capacity and to minimize the downlink interference on the radio interface.05 PWRINCSS=DB4. The BTS generates these commands after evaluation of MS measurement reports.08 GSM 04. Eckardt Bertermann.05 GSM 12. unit: range: default: Reference: MS power control enabled. 2dB DB2. range: default: Reference: TRUE. If the timer exspires before the requested transmission power is reached the power control decision process is resumed.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. defines the step size used when increasing the MS transmit power. 2 SACCH multiframes 1-31 2 GSM 05. The timer administered with PWRCONF is started after the initiation of the power modification.

unit: range: default: Reference: 2 SACCH multiframes 0-31 2 GSM 05. PCONINT=2 --> both 4 SACCH multiframes). For this reason the value for PCONINT should correspond to the averaging window size (e. power control decision messages are suspended after a power control command as long as the timer has not expired (1unit = 2 SACCH multiframes). For the latter case (DTX active) the weighting factor is always ‘1’. defines the minimum time period between 2 successive modifications of the RF power level of an MS.08 LOWTLEVD=15.e. unit: range: default: Reference: 74 / 142 1 dB 0-63 0 = less than -110dBm 1 = -110dBm 2 = -109dBm . The averaging period the size of the window. the DTX weighting factor determines how much more mesaurements with ‘DTX not active’ (i.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.08 Version 30. Power control averaging parameters quality. defines the lower threshold of the received signal level on the downlink for power increase. 62 = -48dBm 63 = greater than -48dBm 15 GSM 05. the oldest measurement is removed from the window. The window is a queue: when a new measurement is received. All the quality-measurements concerning power-control pass an averaging algorithm. defines the averaging parameters for the signal quality measurements.08 PAVRLEV=4-1. The values entered for this parameter are valid for both the uplink and downlink measurement reports.e. as PCONINT intervals fit into the averaging window size. Parameter format: averaging period (in SACCH periods) . unit: range: default: Reference: 1 SACCH multiframe (averaging period) 1-31 (averaging period) 1-3 (DTX weighting factor) 4 (averaging period) 2 (DTX weighting factor) GSM 05. Power control lower threshold level downlink.. For the averaging principle.2000 Power control interval. Within the succeeding averaging window there are as many power increase /decrease decisions executed. parameter format and parameter meaning please refer to the explanation given for the previous parameter PAVRLEV.08 PAVRQUAL=4-2. The algorithm can be described as a window. speech transmitted) are weighted than those with ‘DTX active’ (i. Power control averaging parameters level. no speech transmitted).. PAVRLEV=4-x. i. In other words: From the previous averaging window (see PAVRLEV/PAVRQUAL) the PWRC algorithm determines whether the power increase or decrease is necessary. The following rule has to be considered: HOLTHLVDL (SET HAND) < LOWTLEVD < [LOWTLEVD (SET PWRC) + 2∗PWRREDSS (SET PWRC)] < UPTLEVD (SET PWRC) Eckardt Bertermann.0 PCONINT=2. unit: range: default: Reference: 1 SACCH multiframe (averaging period) 1-31 (averaging period) 1-3 (DTX weighting factor) 4 (averaging period) 1 (DTX weighting factor) GSM 05.03. All the level-measurements concerning power-control pass an averaging algorithm. The values entered for this parameter are valid for both the uplink and downlink measurement reports.DTX weighting factor.e. All values inside the window are used to calculate the arithmetic average.g. defines the averaging parameters for the signal level measurements. TAC3 SBS .

unit: range: default: Reference: 1 dB 0-63 0 = less than -110dBm 1 = -110dBm 2 = -109dBm ..4% 6 = 6.8% 4 GSM 05.0 UPTLEVD=20. The following rule has to be considered: HOLTHQUDL (SET HAND) > LOWTQUAD (SET PWRC) > UPTQUAD (SET PWRC) Power control upper threshold quality downlink.. defines the lower threshold of the received signal quality on the downlink for power increase.4% to 12. range: default: Reference: 0-7 0 = less than 0.2% 5 = 3. defines the upper threshold of the received signal quality on the downlink for power reduction. unit: range: default: Reference: 1 dB 0-63 0 = less than -110dBm 1 = -110dBm 2 = -109dBm .2% 1 = 0.8% 7 = greater than 12.2% to 0.4% to 0.6% 4 = 1. range: default: Reference: 75 / 142 0-7 0 = less than 0.2% to 0. The following rule has to be considered: UPTQUAD (SET PWRC) < LOWTQUAD (SET PWRC) < HOLTHQUDL (SET HAND) Eckardt Bertermann.2000 Power control upper threshold level downlink.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.8% 3 = 0..08 LOWTQUAD=5.08 UPTLEVU=15. 62 = -48dBm 63 = greater than -48dBm 20 GSM 05.08 LOWTLEVU=10.08 Version 30.08 UPTQUAD=1.4% to 12. 62 = -48dBm 63 = greater than -48dBm 0-63 15 GSM 05. 62 = -48dBm 63 = greater than -48dBm 10 GSM 05. The following rule has to be considered: UPTLEVD (SET PWRC) > [LOWTLEVD (SET PWRC) + 2∗PWRREDSS (SET PWRC)] > LOWTLEVD > HOLTHLVDL (SET HAND) Power control lower threshold level uplink.4% 2 = 0.8% to 1. TAC3 SBS .2% 5 = 3. defines the lower threshold of the received signal level on the uplink for power increase..8% 7 = greater than 12.8% 5 GSM 05.6% to 3.2% to 6. unit: range: range: default: Reference: 1 dB 0-63 0 = less than -110dBm 1 = -110dBm 2 = -109dBm .4% 6 = 6. defines the upper threshold of the received signal level on the downlink for power reduction. The following rule has to be considered: UPTLEVU (SET PWRC) > [LOWTLEVU (SET PWRC) + 2∗PWRREDSS (SET PWRC)] > LOWTLEVU > HOLTHLVUL (SET HAND) Power control lower threshold quality downlink.8% to 1.2% to 6..03.4% to 0. The following rule has to be considered: HOLTHLVUL (SET HAND) < LOWTLEVU < [LOWTLEVU (SET PWRC) + 2∗PWRREDSS (SET PWRC)] < UPTLEVU (SET PWRC) Power control upper threshold level uplink. defines the upper threshold of the received signal level on the uplink for power reduction.2% 1 = 0..8% 3 = 0.6% 4 = 1.6% to 3.4% 2 = 0.

The following rule has to be considered: HOLTHQUUL (SET HAND) > LOWTQUAU (SET PWRC) > UPTQUAU (SET PWRC) Power control upper threshold quality uplink.2% 5 = 3. Rule: RDLNKTBS > PCRLFTH .4% to 0.8% 7 = greater than 12.08 Version 30.8% 3 = 0.4% to 12.8% to 1. range: default: Reference: 76 / 142 0-64 12 GSM 05. The following rule has to be considered: UPTQUAU (SET PWRC) < LOWTQUAU (SET PWRC) < HOLTHQUUL (SET HAND) Radio link counter BS. defines the threshold value for the radio link counter in the BTS for ‘radio link failure warning’ detection (see parameter RDLNKBTS). indicates the maximum value of the radio link counter needed to detect a radio link failure in the uplink. range: default: Reference: 0-7 0 = less than 0. range: default: Reference: TRUE.08 EPWCRLFW=TRUE.2% 1 = 0.08 GSM 05. If the parameter EPWCRLFW is set to TRUE and the counter reaches the value entered for the parameter PCRLFTH (see next parameters) the BTS initiates the adjustment of the MS and BS power control to maximum transmit power. Unsuccessful decoding of SACCH messages in the BTS lead to a decrease of the counter by 1.2% 5 = 3. This feature (when activated) leads to power increase to maximum if the radio link counter in the BTS reaches the value entered for the parameter PCRLFTH (see parameter RDLNKBTS).8% 5 GSM 05. FALSE FALSE GSM 05.6% 4 = 1.4% to 12. a CONNECTION FAILURE INDICATION with cause 'radio link failure' is indicated and the connection is released. TAC3 SBS .6% to 3. successful decoding to an increase by 2.8% 3 = 0.08 PCRLFTH=12. defines the lower threshold of the received signal quality on the uplink for power increase.6% 4 = 1.03.4% 6 = 6. MS and BS power control indication due to ‘radio link failure warning' enabled.8% 4 GSM 05.2% to 6.08 RDLNKTBS=24.2% to 6.8% 7 = greater than 12. range: default: Reference: 0-7 0 = less than 0. The entered value is the start point for the counter in the BTS which corresponds to the ‘S’ counter in the MS (see parameter ‘RDLNKTO’ in the ‘PKG_BTSO’).08 UPTQUAU=1. range: default: Reference: 4-64 24 GSM 04.4% 2 = 0.2% 1 = 0. defines the upper threshold of the received signal quality on the uplink for power reduction.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.2000 Power control lower threshold quality uplink.8% to 1. If the counter reaches the value 0.6% to 3.4% 6 = 6.4% 2 = 0. Eckardt Bertermann.4% to 0.2% to 0.0 LOWTQUAU=5. Power control radio link failure threshold.2% to 0.

PWRREDSS=DB2.PCRLFTH=8. FALSE FALSE Version 30.LOWTQUAD=5. UPTQUAU=4. range: default: TRUE. if BS PWRC is enabled the MS is informed about this by a flag in the SYS_INFO (see parameter EBSPWRC).EPWCRLFW=TRUE. UPTLEVD=20. b) The MS thus provides valid measurement reports even for the BCCH carrier.which means that no handover is possible.PAVRQUAL=4-2. this parameter is necessary to ensure full handover functionality if BS power control is enabled while channels are created with frequency hopping system.RDLNKTBS=24. SET PWRC:NAME=bsc:0/pwrc:1. 77 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann. If frequency hopping is disabled (PKG_BTSO: HOPP=FALSE) which could be the case after frequency redefinition due to failure of a TRX . c) The BTS takes care that the ‘full power’ part from the BCCH carrier is correctly substracted from the measurement reports. Setting this parameter to TRUE has the follwing results: a) The BS PWRC flag is permanently set to ‘0’(=disabled) in the SYS_INFO even if the parameter EBSPWRC=TRUE.PAVRLEV=4-1.PWRCONF=2. This flag makes the MS suppress measurement reports derived from the BCCH carrier in order to avoid the measurements to be falsified by the ‘full power’ part of the BCCH (PWRC must not be used on the BCCH carrier).EBSPWCR=TRUE.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.LOWTLEVU=10.EMSPWRC=TRUE. TAC3 SBS .UPTLEVU=15. Normally.PCONINT=2.LOWTLEVD=15.LOWTQUAU=5.PWRINCSS=DB4.EBSPWRC=TRUE.0 EBSPWCR=TRUE.the MS may hop on the BCCH carrier only. In this case all measurement reports are supressed (or declared ‘not valid’) by the MS .UPTQUAD=4.03.2000 Enable BS power control correction.

SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.03. TAC3 SBS Power Control Indiaction due to link failure warning PWRC: EPWCRLFW=TRUE PCRLFTH RDLNKTBS .2000 Power Control Parameter Relations Power Control Parameters relevant for both MS and BS Power Control PWRC: PWRINCSS PWRREDSS PAVRLEV PAVRQUAL PCONINT PWRCONF 78 / 142 MS Power Control BS Power Control PWRC: EMSPWRC=TRUE PWRC: EBSPWRC=TRUE LOWTLEVD LOWTQUAD UPTLEVD UPTQUAD LOWTLEVU LOWTQUAU UPTLEVU UPTQUAU EBSPWCR Eckardt Bertermann.0 Version 30.

It is the minimum Rx level required for a MS to perform the handover to the adjacent cell. other BTSE.). TAC3 SBS . from the SYS_INFO_Type5 the MS knows the neighbour cells which have to be monitored for handover.08 GSM 05. For details see the same parameter in the command SET BTS PKGBTSB. this identity corresponds to the info sent on the BCCH of the neighbour cell in the message SYS_INFO_Type3 and 4.08 GSM 05. Important: The ‘adjacent_cell-no..08 GSM 12.20 RXLEVMIN=20.2000 F General hint concerning the neighbour cell relations: All adjacent cells that are created for a certain BTS appear in the SYSTEM_INFORMATION_Type2 (MS in idle mode) and SYSTEM_INFORMATION_Type5 (MS in dedicated mode) in the IE ‘Neighbour Cells Description’.’ and the actual ‘bts-no. Creating the Adjacent Cells: CREATE ADJC: NAME=BSC:0/bts:0/adjc:0. The MS measures the RXLEV of these neighbour cells to provide MEASUREMENT REPORTS to the serving BTS which uses them for the handover decision.BCC (for detailed explanations see parameter BSIC (SET BTS PKGBTSB)). 62 = -49dBm to -48dBm 63 = greater than -48dBm 20 GSM 05.’ is just a relative number of the adjacent cell from point of view of the cell (resp. parameter format: NCC .. The selected value should correspond to the actual settings of the BTS represented by the neighbour cell (see SET BTS PKGBTSB:RXLEVAMI =. Object path name.).20 Cell Global Identity. It is used by the MS to correctly decode the BCCH bursts of the neighbour cell. Rx level minimum.’ of the adjacent cell! BSIC=7-7.. unit: range: default: Reference: 79 / 142 1 dB 0-63 0 = less than -110dBm 1 = -110dBm to -109dBm 2 = -109dBm to -108dBm .08 GSM 12. Eckardt Bertermann.. From the SYS_INFO_Type2 the MS knows the neighbour cells which have to be monitored for cell reselection.03 GSM 04. Base Station Identity Code. The necessity to create a BTS as ADJC is independent of its physical location (same BTSE. This parameter is used in the handover preprocessing algorithm in the BTS which evaluates the measurement reports in order to determine the target cells for handover and directed retry. There is no correspondence between this ‘adjacent_cell-no.03. BTS) for which it is created.08 GSM 12. range: Reference: MCC: 0-999 MNC: 0-999 (PCS1900) MNC: 0-99 (all others) LAC: 0-65535 CI: 0-65535 GSM 03. other BSC etc.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.03 GSM 04.02 GSM 05.20 CELLGLID="262"-"02"-11111.0 Version 30. range: 0-7 (NCC) 0-7 (BCC) Reference: GSM 03. This info is sent in the DCCH in the HANDOVER COMMAND in the IE ‘Cell Description’. determines the minimum received signal level the adjacent cell must provide to be regarded as a suitable target cell for handover.

e. e. Eckardt Bertermann. The power budget is .20 HOMSOFF=0.simply expressed .20 HOM=69. This info appears (together with the other adjacent cells) on the BCCH (SYS_INFO_Type5) in the IE ‘Neighbour Cells Description’ and .08 GSM 12. It specifies the static offset by which the handover margin is increased as long as the timer HOMDTIME runs.the difference of the receive levels in the current and in the neighbour cell .5! BCCHFREQ=71. This parameter defines the BCCH frequency of the neighbour cell. For further details please refer to the explanation given for the parameter HOMDTIME. unit.also in the main DCCH in the HANDOVER COMMAND in the IE ‘Cell Description’. Value range: GSM900: 2-15 default: 2=39dBm (stepsize -2dBm) DCS1800: 0-15 default: 0=30dBm (stepsize -2dBm) GSMR: 0-15 default: 0=30dBm (stepsize -2dBm) PCS1900: 0-15 default: 0=30dBm (stepsize -2dBm). if a MS moves along a boundary between two cells. Via the information sent in the SYS_INFO_Type5 the MS is informed which of the neighbour cells are to be monitored during the call phase. This parameter is used in the handover preprocessing algorithm in the BTS which evaluates the measurement reports in order to determine the target cells for handover and directed retry.PWRREDcomplete) [dB] ’HOMcoloc ’ is the handover margin set for an adjacent cell object that represents a ’colocated cell’ (see parameter CCELL (SET HAND)). unit: range: default: Reference: 1dB 0-126 0 = -63dB 126 = +63dB 69 (= 6dB) GSM 05. for which neighbour cells measurement reports may be generated.05 GSM 12. 31=32dBm Handover margin.2000 Maximum transmission power level. indicates the maximum transmission power level a MS is allowed to use in the serving cell. TAC3 SBS .0 MSTXPMAXCL=2. unit: range: default: 80 / 142 1dB 0-127 0 Version 30.g.08 GSM 05. Only if the power budget exceeds the value defined for the handover margin the power budget handover criteria are fulfilled and the BTS sends an appropriate HANDOVER CONDITION INDICATION message to the BSC. The purpose of the handover margin is to prevent repetitive handover between adjacent cells..20 Paramater range extended in BR4. BCCH frequency. Different adjacent cells can be assigned different handover margins in order to control the handover flow.) is recommended but not mandatory since the two parameters are independent: MSTXPMAXCL (ADJC) is only used by the handover algorithm in the BTS.power control is taken into account. MSTXPMAX (BTS::PKG_BTSB) determines the allowed transmit power in the IE ‘Power command’ on TCH Assignment.05 GSM 12. range: 0-1023 Reference: GSM 05.08 GSM 05. Handover margin static offset.during Handover . range and default values see explanation to the right! Reference: GSM 05..03.08 GSM 04.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. i. This parameter is only relevant for speed sensitive handover (see parameter MICROCELL). The selection of a value corresponding to the actual settings of the BTS represented by the neighbour cell (see SET BTS PKGBTSB: MSTXPMAX=. Rule: To avoid ’ping pong’ handovers between the inner and complete areas in sectorized concentric cells the following rule must be followed: HOMcoloc > (PWRREDinner . this parameter defines a threshold for the power budget handover. 30-31 30=33dBm.

This timer is only used if speed sensitive handover is active (see parameter MICROCELL). Handover margin dynamic offset. Forced handover Rx level minimum offset. Eckardt Bertermann. Only if this parameter is set to TRUE the ‘speed sensitive handover’ algorithm will be in effect for this neighbour cell. In other words: Only if the actual RxLev of an adjacent cell is greater than the sum of RXLEVMIN and FHORLMO (simplified) the BTS regards this cell as a suitable candidate for the directed rety procedure and will insert it into the target cell list included in the HANDOVER CONDITION INDICATION message.e. Microcell. If the basic power budget handover condition (i. unit: range: default: 81 / 142 1dB 0-24 6 Version 30. unit: range: default: 1 SACCH multiframe 0-255 0 HOMDOFF=0. the timer HOMDTIME is started: as long as this timer runs the handover margin (see parameter HOM) is artificially increased by a static offset (see parameter HOMSOFF). Thus a speed sensitive handover condition is fulfilled if PGBT > HO_MARGIN_TIME(t) where HO_MARGIN_TIME(t) = HOM + HOMSOFF for t ≤ HOMDTIME and HO_MARGIN_TIME(n) = HOM + HOMSOFF . This value must be added to the RXLEVMIN entered for this adjacent cell in order to calculate the minimum RxLev the neighbour cell must provide to be considered as a target cell for the directed retry. PBGT > HOM) still exists when the timer expires. section ‘Handover Thresholds&Algorithms’ of this document. TAC3 SBS .2000 Handover margin delaytime. It specifies the time an immediate handover request is delayed when a power budget handover to a microcell is requested. a dynamic offset (see parameter HOMDOFF) is substracted from HO_MARGIN_TIME(t) again. It specifies the dynamic offset by which the handover margin is reduced after expiry of the timer HOMDTIME. unit: range: default: 1dB 0-127 0 MICROCELL=FALSE. FALSE FALSE FHORLMO=6. PBGT > HOM) does not exist any more the timer is stopped and the handover is not executed. Precondition: the database flag for speed sensitive handover is set to ‘enabled’ (SET HAND:DPBGTHO=TRUE).03. if the BTS detects that the basic power budget handover condition (i.This parameter is only relevant for speed sensitive handover.0 HOMDTIME=0. For further details please refer to chapter ‘Appendix’.HOMDOFF for t > HOMDTIME As long as the timer HOMDTIME runs the basic power budget handover condition is permanently checked. General Principle of the speed sensitive handover algorithm: If the BTS detects a power budget handover condition for a cell which is created as MICROCELL. determines the margin for ‘Forced Handover’ respectively ‘Directed Retry’ (see also parameter ENFORCHO (SET BSC PKGBSCB)) in units of dB in stepsize 1.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.e. This ‘new’ handover margin is called HO_MARGIN_TIME(t) since its value is time dependent. Note: The values should be set according to the rule: HOMDOFF ≥ HOMSOFF. For further details please refer to the explanation given for the parameter HOMDTIME. determines whether the adjacent cell is regarded as a ‘microcell’. range: default: TRUE.

Rule: PLNC(n) < PPLNC(n) n = no.03. range: default: 0-15 0 = highest priority 15 = lowest priority 0 PPLNC=0. A mechanism is implemented which prevents backhandovers due to power budget to the cell which was the origin of the directed retry. RXLEVMIN (n). this parameter is only considered if the flag NOBAKHO (see SET HAND) is set to TRUE. This message makes the BTS suppress the handover origin cell in all following INTERCELL HANDOVER CONDITION INDICATION messages sent with the cause 'better cell' for the time period administrable with TIMERFHO.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. Penalty priority layer of neighbour cell. Rule: TINHFAIHO > THORQST(HAND) > T7 (PKGBSCT) Eckardt Bertermann. It specifies the time period for which the BTS excludes a specific adjacent cell from the target cell list when the threshold for the maximum allowed number of failed handovers (see parameter MAXFAILHO (SET HAND)) has been reached. After the timer expiration the power budget handover handover is allowed again. Rule: TINHBAKHO > THORQST(HAND) > T7 (PKGBSCT) Timer to inhibit handover failure repetition. PPLNC is only evaluated by the ranking algorithm as long as the handover margin delay timer HOMDTIME is running. PBGT(n) and HO_MARGIN(n) please refer to the section ‘Handover Thresholds & Algorithms’.Pa). this parameter is relevant for the handover decision if the features ‘speed sensitive handover’ (see parameter DPBGTHO (SET HAND)) and ‘ranking of target cells on the basis of priority’ (see parameter HIERC (SET HAND)) is enabled. It specifies the time period for which the BTS excludes the adjacent cell from the power budget handover decision if this cell was the origin of an imperative handover. For the terms RXLEV_NCELL(n). this parameter determines the priority layer of the adjacent cell. Its purpose is to to allow the operator to temporarily decrease the priority of the affected neighbour cell to avoid handovers into this cell for fast moving MSs. unit: range: default: 1s 1-254 30 TINHFAIHO=5. Timer to inhibit back handover. Priority layer of neighbour cell. of a certain ADJC object Level offset for neighbour cell. unit: range: default: 82 / 142 1s 1-254 5 Version 30. The prioity layer is relevant for the handover decision if the feature ‘ranking of target cells on the basis of priority layer’ (see parameter HIERC (SET HAND)) is enabled. Max(0. this timer is started after a ‘Directed Retry’ procedure. unit: range: default: 1 dB 0-63 0 TINHBAKHO=30.08 cause IE with the cause 'forced'. range: default: 0-15 0 = highest priority 15 = lowest priority 0 LEVONC=0.0 TIMERFHO=12. unit: range: default: 10s 1-320 12 (=120s) PLNC=0. this parameter is only considered if the flag NOFREPHO (see SET HAND) is set to TRUE.2000 Timer for forced handover. this parameter determines the level offset that is added to the minimum receive level of an adjacent cell if ‘ranking method 1’ is selected in the ‘Hierarchical cell ranking flag’ (For further details please see the explanation for the parameter HIERF (SET HAND)). It determines the temporary priority layer of those adjacent cells which are defined as microcells (see parameter MICROCELL). TAC3 SBS . This mechanism works in the following way: if a directed retry is performed the BSC extends the CHANNEL ACTIVATION message for the 'new' TCH in the target cell by the IE 'Cell List Preferred' which contains the CGI of the handover origin cell and by a GSM 08.

RXLEVMIN=20.03.ABISCH=0-1.BSIC=7-7. . CREATE ADJC:NAME=BSC:0/bts:0/adjc:1.TIMERFHO=12.TINHFAIHO=5.CELLGLID="262"-"02"-35351. LEVONC=0. CREATE LPDLR:NAME=BSC:0/bts:1/lpdlr:1. Further adjacent cells for BTS-1: CREATE ADJC:NAME=BSC:0/bts:0/adjc:0.PLNC=0.CELLGLID="262"-"02"-32321.BCCHFREQ=39. .HOMSOFF=0.TINHBAKHO=30.MICROCELL=FALSE.ABISCH=0-10. .RXLEVMIN=20. They are used for transmission of call processing information. HOMDOFF=0.BSIC=7-7.TINHFAIHO=5.MSTXPMAXCL=2.PPLNC=0. ABISCH=0-1.BSIC=7-7.BCCHFREQ=39.MSTXPMAXCL=2.2000 Further adjacent cells for BTS-0: CREATE ADJC:NAME=BSC:0/bts:0/adjc:1.HOM=28.MSTXPMAXCL=2. HOMDOFF=0.TIMERFHO=12.RXLEVMIN=20.FHORLMO=6.HOMDTIME=0.HOM=30.ABISCH=0-10. LEVONC=0.BCCHFREQ=91. . . LEVONC=0.PLNC=0.MICROCELL=FALSE. HOMDOFF=0.TINHBAKHO=30.BSIC=7-7. LEVONC=0. .PPLNC=0. CREATE ADJC:NAME=BSC:0/bts:0/adjc:2.MSTXPMAXCL=2.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.HOM=28.HOMDTIME=0.MICROCELL=FALSE.CELLGLID="262"-"02"-10101. Note: In this case all LPDLRs are created on the same PCMB because a multidrop chain is configured. timeslot-no. 83 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann.TINHFAIHO=5.HOMDTIME=0.subslot). . .CELLGLID="262"-"02"-32321.TINHBAKHO=30.PLNC=0.RXLEVMIN=20. Abis channel: pcmb-no.TIMERFHO=12.PPLNC=0. > CREATE LPDLR: NAME=BSC:0/bts:0/lpdlr:0.0 Version 30. HOMDOFF=0.TINHFAIHO=5. .FHORLMO=6.ABISCH=0-1. Creating the LPDLR links: < LPDLR links are the LAPD channels assigned to a single TRX within a BTSE.PPLNC=0. Object path name. .HOMSOFF=0.HOMDTIME=0.BCCHFREQ=10. . CREATE LPDLR:NAME=BSC:0/bts:0/lpdlr:3.FHORLMO=6.HOMSOFF=0.HOM=30. TAC3 SBS . CREATE LPDLR:NAME=BSC:0/bts:0/lpdlr:2.MICROCELL=FALSE. .TIMERFHO=12.ABISCH=0-1.TINHBAKHO=30. . 1-24 for PCM24 link Further LPDLR links for BTS-0: CREATE LPDLR:NAME=BSC:0/bts:0/lpdlr:1. Further LPDLR-links for BTS-1: CREATE LPDLR:NAME=BSC:0/bts:1/lpdlr:0.HOMSOFF=0.FHORLMO=6.PLNC=0.timeslot (.

specifies the granularity periods for retrieval of the measurement reports which are to be sent on the Abis interface in case they are enabled.03.PWRREDcomplete) [dB] (for parameters HORXLVDLI and HORXLVDLO see commend SET HAND). Radio measurement reports. OFF OFF RADIOMG=254. Radio measurement granularity. specifies the number of 2-dB-steps the Tx power should be reduced from the maximum transmit power. 975-1023 SYSID=EXT900: 0-124. Object path name. In some cases. however.PWRREDcomplete) [dB] ’HOMcoloc ’ is the handover margin set for an adjacent cell object that represents a ’colocated cell’ (see parameter CCELL (SET HAND)). TRXFREQ=10.2000 Creating the TRXs: CREATE TRX: NAME=BSC:0/bts:0/trx:0. TRX frequency. Since in the SBS the preevaluation of measurement reports for handover decisions is done in the BTS.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. 2) To avoid ’ping pong’ handovers between the inner and complete areas in sectorized concentric cells the following rule must be followed: HOMcoloc > (PWRREDinner . assigns a radio frequency to a transceiver. range: Reference: 0-1023 GSM 04. Only in this case the feature should be activated since it results in additional load on the LPDLR links.124 SYSID=F2ONLY900: 0-124. Since the sending power determines the actual cell size the PWRRED parameter is used to adjust the sending power according to the desired transmission range. it is useful to monitor the measurement reports on the Abis interface for test purposes. specfies whether radio measurement report transmission via the Abis interface is enabled. 975-1023 SYSID=DCS1800: 512-885 SYSID=GSMR: 955-974 SYSID=PCS1900: 512-820 .08 PWRRED=6. range: default: ON.08 RADIOMR=OFF.08 GSM 05.0 Version 30. Eckardt Bertermann. unit: range: default: Reference: 2dB 0-6 (0dB-12dB) 6 GSM 05. Note for concentric cells: Since in concentric cells this parameter determines the different ranges of inner and complete area TRXs it must be set in accordance with the setting of the parameter TRXAREA (see below)! Rules: 1) To avoid ’ping pong’ handovers in concentric cells between inner and complete area the following rule must be followed: HORXLVDLO . normally no measurement reports are sent from BTS to BSC.HORXLVDLI > (PWRREDinner . TAC3 SBS . allowed frequencies (please refer to the parameter SYSID (CREATE BTS PKGBTSB)): SYSID=BB900: 1. unit: range: default: 84 / 142 1 SACCH multiframe 1-254 254 Power reduction.

SDCCH) must belong to the complete area (see command CREATE CHAN). RADIOMG=254. range: default: TRUE.PWRRED=6.TRXFREQ=71. INNER.TRXFREQ=62.PWRRED=6.RADIOMR=OFF.TRXAREA=NONE.RADIOMR=OFF. this parameter determines whether a TRX belongs to the ’Emergency Configuration’ or not (see also parameters EMT1and EMT2 inthe command CREATE BTSM).TRXFREQ=110.PWRRED=6. TAC3 SBS . FALSE TRUE TRXAREA=NONE.TRXAREA=NONE.TRXFREQ=60.this parameter must be set in conjunction with a sensible setting of PWRRED (see above)! . CREATE TRX:NAME=BSC:0/bts:0/trx:3. TRX area. Further TRXs for BTS-0: CREATE TRX:NAME=BSC:0/bts:0/trx:1. Setting MOEC to TRUE for a TRX means that the HW associated to this TRX will be powered if emergency configuration is entered.PWRRED=6. COMPLETE NONE Version 30.TRXAREA=NONE. CREATE TRX:NAME=BSC:0/bts:0/trx:2. range: default: NONE.RADIOMR=OFF.MOEC=TRUE.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.MOEC=TRUE. CREATE TRX:NAME=BSC:0/bts:0/trx:1. if yes. ’Emergancy configuration’ is entered in case of a failure of the external BTSE power supply (alarm ’ACDC MAINS BREAKDOWN’) or if the shelter temperature exceeds the allowed threshold (alarm ’SHELTER TEMPERATURE OUT OF TOLERANCE’).TRXFREQ=80. RADIOMG=254.2000 Member of emergency configuration. Further TRXs for BTS-1: CREATE TRX:NAME=BSC:0/bts:1/trx:0. Its purpose is to keep only the most important BTSE units and TRXs alive and thus to save power as long as the BTSE is powered by the backup battery.RADIOMR=OFF. Notes: . RADIOMG=254.TRXAREA=NONE.03. RADIOMG=254. 85 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann.TRXAREA=NONE.MOEC=TRUE.0 MOEC=TRUE.MOEC=TRUE.RADIOMR=OFF. RADIOMG=254.MOEC=TRUE. whether it serves the inner or the complete area.the BCCH frequency and all other frequencies with control channels (CCCH. this parameter specifies whether a TRX belongs to a concentric cell and.PWRRED=6.

Hopping sequence number. If the bit position representing a frequency is ‘1’ then the associated frequency is contained in the mobile allocation.MOBALLOC=60&80&110. for every frequency contained in the 'cell allocation frequency list' an own bit position is provided.2000 Creating the Frequency Hopping systems: CREATE FHSY: < Frequency hopping system. 86 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann.02 GSM 04. This means that two FHSYIDs have to be defined: one for the complete area (MOBALLOC may only consist of TRX frequencies of the complete area) and one for the inner area (MOBALLOC may only consist of TRX frequencies of the complete area. range: Reference: 0-63 GSM 05. In this case the IE also contains the HSN together with the MAIO.08 Mobile allocation list.) CREATE FHSY:NAME=BSC:0/bts:0/fhsy:2. is a list of absolute frequencies used in the hopping sequence.g.bts-no. . If frequency hopping is enabled the parameter H is set to 1. This IE ‘Mobile Allocation’ is a bit map in which e. FHSY .This info is sent in the main DCCH in the IE ‘Channel Description’ contained in the ASSIGNMENT COMMAND and in the HANDOVER COMMAND if it was assigned to the used channel. range: Reference: 0-1023 (each field) GSM 05. is put in the last position in the list. > NAME=BSC:0/bts:0/fhsy:1. except that ARFCN 0. This info is sent in the main DCCH in the IE ‘Mobile Allocation’. In the cell allocation frequency list the absolute RF channel numbers are placed in increasing order of ARFCN. HSN=10. determines the hopping sequence’s respective algorithm.08 GSM 04. TAC3 SBS . The value ‘0’ means cyclic hopping.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. Note: If the FHSYID is created for a concentric cell (SET BTS PKGBTSB:CONCELL=TRUE) then hopping is only allowed within the complete and within the inner area.0 Version 30.HSN=10.fhsy-no.08 MOBALLOC=10&60&80& 110.03. which is contained in the ASSIGNMENT COMMAND and in the HANDOVER COMMAND. The 'cell allocation frequency list' is derived from the set of frequencies defined by the reference 'Cell Channel Description' IE (see also parameter CALL in SET BTS PKGBTSB). if included in the set. Object path name.

02 GSM 04. there are only 3 SDCCH available if BCBCH is selected.4 and 6 of C0.3) + SACCH/C4 (0. .having detected that there are more than one (from the CCCH_CONF) . possible values: a) normal broadcast control channel including frequency correction and synchronization cannel: MAINBCCH = FCCH + SCH + BCCH + CCCH* b) broadcast and common CCH only CCCH = BCCH + CCCH* c) MBCCH plus stand-alone dedicated CCH/4 MBCCHC = FCH + SCH + BCCH + CCCH* + SDCCH/C4 (0.03. which is part of the IE ‘Control Channel description’ sent in the SYS_INFO3 on the BCCH. Object path name.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.A MBCCHC or a BCBCH can only be created if NBLKACGR ≤ 2 (see corresponding parameter in command SET BTS PKGBTSC) .0 Version 30. range: default: Reference: 87 / 142 Frequency hopping system identifier.The CBCH replaces the 2nd SDCCH. 0-63 0 GSM 05.select one of the available BCCHs on the basis of their IMSI.CCCH) must belong to the complete area.3) + CBCH *CCCH = PCH + RACH + AGCH Notes: .3) + SACCH/C4 (0. only one CBCH is allowed per cell. .02 GSM 04. TAC3 SBS . The info about the used control channel configuration is sent in the Parameter ‘CCCH-CONF’. If more than one BCCH is created for a cell the MSs observe the BCCH on timeslot 0 first and . Channel type.e....on timeslot 0 of C0! .Only one FCCH/SCH is allowed per cell .3) d) MBCCHC plus SMS cell broadcast channel BCBCH = FCCH + SCH + BCCH + CCCH* + SDCCH/C4 (0. i. range: Reference: see parameter explanations on the right GSM 05. not used here since FHSYID=0. CHTYPE=MAINBCCH.In a concentric cell all frequencies with common control channels (BCCH.02 GSM 04.. range: default: Reference: 0-10 0 = no hopping GSM 05.20 MAIO=0.2000 Creating the BCCH for the cell: CREATE CHAN: NAME=BSC:0/bts:0/trx:0 /chan:0.01 GSM 05.Creation of additional BCCH+CCCH is possible but only on the timeslots 2.08 GSM 12. Mobile allocation index offset. 0(=no hopping) is mandatory for the BCCH.08 FHSYID=0.08 Eckardt Bertermann.

only one CBCH is allowed per cell. .0 (TSC=) range: default: Reference: 0-7 BCC of BSIC (BTS:PKG_BTSB) GSM 05. Notes: . BCCH for BTS-1: CREATE CHAN:NAME=BSC:0/bts:1/trx:0/chan:0.CHTYPE=MBCCHC.7) + SACCH/C8 (0. this parameter defines whether the channel is used in 'extended mode' for extended cells or not. If no value is entered for the parameter TSC the BCC is automatically selected. range: default: TRUE. CHTYPE=SCBCH. SCH and FCCH. i. Channel type.. this optional parameter specifies the Training Sequence Code of the radio channel. possible values: a) pure stand-alone dedicated CCH/8 incl.01 GSM 05. FALSE FALSE Version 30.2 and 3! . This is necessary for the correct selection and decoding of the BCCH bursts.An SCBCH can only be created if NBLKACGR > 0 (see corresponding parameter in command SET BTS PKGBTSC) .e.02 GSM 04. Object path name. see SET BTS PKGBTSB parameter BSIC) so that the MS can derive the TSC of the BCCH from the SCH. The TSC is part of the ‘Normal Bursts’ which are used for all channel types except RACH. EXTMODE=FALSE. The TSC for the BCCH must correspond to the BCC (part of the BSIC sent on the SCH.2.03.4.If the celltype is extended cell (i.. SACCH SDCCH = SDCCH/C8 (0. .The radio timeslot of an 'extended' channel must have an even number (0.e..02 GSM 04.7) b) SDCCH/8 plus SMS cell broadcast channel SCBCH = SDCCH/C8 (0.In a concentric cell all frequencies with SDCCHs must belong to the complete area.7) + CBCH Notes: . CELLTYPE=EXTCELL (SET BTS PKGBTSB)) then all control channels must be set for 'extended mode'.08 Eckardt Bertermann.).The CBCH replaces the 2nd SDCCH.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. especially if within a limited geographical area a frequency is used several times.MAIO=0.From BR3. there are only 7 SDCCH available.FHSYID=0. Creating the SDCCHs for the cell: < SDCCH for BTS-0 > CREATE CHAN: NAME=BSC:0/bts:0/trx:0 /chan:1. range: Reference: 88 / 142 see parameter explanations on the right GSM 05.The SCBCH can only be created on the timeslots 0. TAC3 SBS . etc..2000 Training Sequence Code. Extended mode.7 on the CBCH must be created on the BCCH TRX..From BR3.7 on at least one SDCCH must be created on the BCCH TRX (due to the implementation of BCCH recovery) . .08 EXTMODE=FALSE.1..7) + SACCH/C8 (0.

08 0-7 BCC of BSIC (BTS:PKG_BTSB) GSM 05. 89 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann.If synthesizer frequency hopping is used. SCH and FCCH. EXTMODE=FALSE.2000 TRUE. Notes: .08 EXTMODE=FALSE. This has to be taken into account when the FHSYIDs are assigned to the CHAN objects. FALSE FALSE Training Sequence Code. hopping is not allowed for any CHAN object belonging to the BCCH TRX..4. This is necessary for the correct decoding of the SDCCH.03. 0=no hopping.20 MAIO=0. CELLTYPE=EXTCELL (SET BTS PKGBTSB)) then all control channels must be set for ’extended mode’. (TSC=) range: default: Version 30. range: default: Reference: 0-10 0 = no hopping GSM 05. etc.02 GSM 04. . The TSC is part of the ‘Normal Bursts’ which are used for all channel types except RACH.02 GSM 04.0 FHSYID=2. all other values ‘X’ must have been created for this cell (BTS) before by CREATE FHSY:NAME=bsc:n/bts:n/fhsyid:x. Notes: .The radio timeslot of an ’extended’ channel must have an even number (0. Extended mode. The TSC entered here is sent to the MS in the IE ‘Channel Description’ within the ASSIGNMENT COMMAND for the SDCCH.02 GSM 04.).If the celltype is extended cell (i. .. range: default: Frequency hopping system identifier.FHSYID=0. If no value is entered for the parameter TSC the system automatically selects the BCC (see parameter BSIC (SET BTS PKGBTSB)) as TSC.In concentric cells (SET BTS PKGBTSB:CONCELL=TRUE) hopping is only allowed within the complete and within the inner area. range: default: Reference: Reference: 0-63 0 GSM 05.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. start position of the channel in the frequency hopping algorithm.2.MAIO=0. this optional parameter specifies the Training Sequence Code of the radio channel.e.CHTYPE=SDCCH.08 GSM 12. Mobile allocation index offset. this parameter defines whether the channel is used in ’extended mode’ for extended cells or not. Additional SDCCH for BTS-1: CREATE CHAN:NAME=BSC:0/bts:1/trx:0/chan:1. TAC3 SBS .

: 1-31 (PCM30) 1-24 (PCM24) subslot-no. The TSC entered here is sent to the MS in the IE ‘Channel Description’ within the ASSIGNMENT COMMAND for the TCH.2000 Creating the TCHs for the cell: CREATE CHAN: NAME=BSC:0/bts:0/trx:0 /chan:1. 0=no hopping.03. Channel type.timeslot no. In this case the IE also contains the HSN together with the MAIO.20 MAIO=0. determines start position of the channel in the frequency hopping algorithm. Eckardt Bertermann. This has to be taken into account when the FHSYIDs are assigned to the CHAN objects. Training Sequence Code.0 Version 30.08 Frequency hopping system identifier. This info is sent in the main DCCH in the IE ‘Channel Description’ (contained e.If synthesizer frequency hopping is used.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. CHTYPE=TCHF_HLF.01 GSM 05. this optional parameter specifies the Training Sequence Code of the radio channel. all other values Y must have been created before by CREATE FHSY:NAME=bsc:n/bts:n/fhsyid:y.In concentric cells (SET BTS PKGBTSB:CONCELL=TRUE) hopping is only allowed within the complete and within the inner area.08 GSM 12. Object path name. parameter structure: pcmb-no.02 GSM 04. Notes: . range: PCMB: 0-34 timeslot-no. range: default: Reference: 0-10 0 = no hopping GSM 05. If no value is entered for the parameter TSC the system automatically selects the BCC (see parameter BSIC (SET BTS PKGBTSB)) as TSC. . 0-7 BCC of BSIC (BTS:PKG_BTSB) GSM 05. Mobile allocation index offset. .02 GSM 04. range: default: Reference: 0-63 0 GSM 05.subslot-no. SCH and FCCH.g.08 TERTCH=0-2-2.08 (TSC=) range: default: Reference: 90 / 142 terrestrial channel. If frequency hopping is enabled the parameter H is set to 1. This is necessary for the correct decoding of the TCH. .02 GSM 04. hopping is not allowed for any CHAN object belonging to the BCCH TRX.: 0-3 FHSYID=1. The TSC is part of the ‘Normal Bursts’ which are used for all channel types except RACH.02 GSM 04. TAC3 SBS . possible values: a) full rate traffic channel TCHFULL = TCH/F + FACCH/F + SACCH/TF b) dual rate (full and half) channels TCHF_HLF = TCH/H(0) + FACCH/H(0) + SACCH/TH(0) + TCH/H(1) range: Reference: see parameter explanations on the right GSM 05. in the ASSIGNMENT COMMAND) if it was assigned to a used channel.

TAC3 SBS .MAIO=1. . TERTCH=0-3-3.EXTMODE=FALSE.MAIO=0. etc.CHTYPE=TCHF_HLF. TERTCH=0-12-2.MAIO=0.CHTYPE=TCHF_HLF.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. 91 / 142 Version 30. . CREATE CHAN:NAME=BSC:0/bts:0/trx:0/chan:0. . If the MS-BTS distance turns out to be small enough for a ’single’ timeslot an intra-cell handover from far to near (’double-tosingle’) is executed immediately (if enabled).CHTYPE=TCHF_HLF.TSC=7.FHSYID=0.2000 Eckardt Bertermann. .EXTMODE=FALSE. CREATE CHAN:NAME=BSC:0/bts:1/trx:0/chan:4. . TERTCH=0-11-3.TSC=7.CHTYPE=TCHF_HLF.MAIO=0. range: default: TRUE. .FHSYID=1.EXTMODE=FALSE.EXTMODE=FALSE. while TCHs may be created as ’single’ and ’extended’ timeslots (see also parameter EXTCHO (SET HAND)). TERTCH=0-12-0.CHTYPE=TCHF_HLF.CHTYPE=TCHF_HLF.2.EXTMODE=FALSE. .MAIO=0. Further channels for BTS-1: CREATE CHAN:NAME=BSC:0/bts:1/trx:0/chan:2.TSC=7. TERTCH=0-3-1.TSC=7. CREATE CHAN:NAME=BSC:0/bts:0/trx:1/chan:1.CHTYPE=TCHF_HLF.CHTYPE=TCHF_HLF.TSC=7.. CREATE CHAN:NAME=BSC:0/bts:1/trx:0/chan:6.If an extended cell is the target of an inter-cell HO the handover will always take place to a ’double’ timeslot first as the BTS can only determine the actual MS-BTS distance when the first MS messages are received. . TERTCH=0-2-3.FHSYID=0.TSC=7. FALSE FALSE Extended mode. CREATE CHAN:NAME=BSC:0/bts:0/trx:0/chan:4.If the celltype is extended cell (PKGBTSB:CELLTYPE=EXTCELL) then all control channels must be set for ’extended mode’.FHSYID=0. this parameter defines whether the channel is used in ’extended mode’ for extended cells or not.EXTMODE=FALSE.MAIO=0.TSC=7.MAIO=0.CHTYPE=TCHF_HLF.FHSYID=1.FHSYID=1. CREATE CHAN:NAME=BSC:0/bts:1/trx:0/chan:7. TERTCH=0-4-1.FHSYID=1.TSC=7.TSC=7.TSC=7. .FHSYID=0.CHTYPE=TCHF_HLF. TERTCH=0-4-2.The radio timeslot of an ’extended’ channel must have an even number (0. TERTCH=0-11-2. . TERTCH=0-12-1.FHSYID=1.4.MAIO=0.MAIO=0. TERTCH=0-12-3.MAIO=1.EXTMODE=FALSE.MAIO=0.CHTYPE=TCHF_HLF. Notes: .TSC=7.EXTMODE=FALSE. CREATE CHAN:NAME=BSC:0/bts:0/trx:0/chan:5.MAIO=1.. .EXTMODE=FALSE. TERTCH=0-3-2.EXTMODE=FALSE.MAIO=0.EXTMODE=FALSE.CHTYPE=TCHF_HLF.FHSYID=0.TSC=7.FHSYID=1.0 EXTMODE=FALSE.EXTMODE=FALSE.EXTMODE=FALSE.TSC=7.FHSYID=1.EXTMODE=FALSE. CREATE CHAN:NAME=BSC:0/bts:0/trx:1/chan:2. . CREATE CHAN:NAME=BSC:0/bts:0/trx:0/chan:7.FHSYID=1. CREATE CHAN:NAME=BSC:0/bts:1/trx:0/chan:5. TERTCH=0-3-0.03.MAIO=1. CREATE CHAN:NAME=BSC:0/bts:1/trx:0/chan:3. .CHTYPE=TCHF_HLF. CREATE CHAN:NAME=BSC:0/bts:0/trx:0/chan:6. TERTCH=0-4-0.TSC=7.CHTYPE=TCHF_HLF.FHSYID=0. . Further channels for BTS-0: CREATE CHAN:NAME=BSC:0/bts:0/trx:0/chan:3.).

The parameters.and SDCCH creation). Object path name. that determine the status of SMS Cell Broadcast. for Extended Cell Handover: CHAN must be created with EXTMODE=TRUE). > SET HAND: NAME=BSC:0/hand:0. however. range: default: Reference: 92 / 142 TRUE.the IE ‘CBCH Mobile Allocation’. Setting the status of SMS-CB and Frequency Hopping: < The command SET BTS PKGBTSO already appeared together with the other BTS-specific packages. SMSCBUSE=TRUE. determines whether the feature Extended Cell Handover is enabled for this cell.03.EXTCHO=FALSE. If the MSBTS distance turns out to be small enough for a ’single’ timeslot an intra-cell handover from far to near (’double-to-single’) is executed immediately (if enabled). > SET BTS PKGBTSO: NAME=BSC:0/bts:0. For this reason DBAEM generates the SET HAND command again at this position with only the relevant parameters included. Note: If an extended cell (PKGBTSB:CELLTYPE=EXTCELL) is the target of an inter-cell HO the handover will always take place to a ’double’ timeslot first as the BTS can only determine the actual MSBTS distance when the first MS messages are received. TAC3 SBS . If this value is set to TRUE the SYS_INFO_Type4 on the BCCH contains the additional IE ‘CBCH Description’ and . however.0 Version 30. Frequency Hopping and Extended Cell Handover must be placed after the CREATE CHAN commands because an activation of these features is only possible if the CHAN objects have been created with the appropriate attributes before (for Frequency Hopping: CHAN must be created with a FHSYID. EXTCHO=FALSE.if Frequency Hopping is enabled . Object path name. This handover is performed on distance criteria determined on the basis of the threshold HOSTAM and the margin HOMRGTA (see SET HAND). For this reason DBAEM generates the PKG_BTSO command again at this position with only the relevant parameters included. range: default: TRUE.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. that determine the status of Extended Cell Handover must be placed after the CREATE CHAN commands because an activation of these features is only possible if the CHAN objects have been created with the appropriate attributes before (EXTMODE=TRUE). Note: Control channels with CBCH capability (BCBCH or SCBCH) may only be deleted if SMSCBUSE is set to FALSE.2000 Setting the status of Extended Cell Handover: < The command SET HAND already appeared together with the other BTS-specific packages. FALSE FALSE GSM 04. Short message service cell broadcast used. The parameters. Extended Cell Handover enabled. this parameter can only be set to TRUE if the BTS radio channels are created accordingly (see BCCH. ’Extended cell handover’ means an intra-cell handover from near to far (singleTS-todoubleTS) or from far to near (doubleTS-to-singleTS). FALSE FALSE SET HAND:NAME=bsc:0/hand:1.08 Eckardt Bertermann. for SMS-CB a SCBCH or a BCBCH must be created for the cell.

range: default: TRUE.03. this parameter specifies the distance limit (between MS and BTS) to be used for call release if the feature 'call release due to excessive distance' is enabled (EEXCDIST=TRUE) Note: The value entered for EXCDIST must be greater than the value entered for the distance handover threshold (see parameter HOTMSRME (SET HAND)). indicates whether frequency hopping is enabled system-internally or not.0 HOPP=TRUE. range: default: TRUE. 93 / 142 Version 30. For this. Excessive distance. indicates whether frequency hopping is manually enabled in the BTS by the operator. The system internal flag can be interrogated by the command GET BTS PKGBTSO.SMSCBUSE=TRUE.0 on HOPP=FALSE actually means that the MSs hop on one carrier if the channels are created with FHSYID≠0. if H=1 then frequency hopping is enabled. SET BTS PKGBTSO:NAME=BSC:0/bts:1. TAC3 SBS . Rules: standard cells: HOTMSRM (HAND) < EXCDIST extended cells: HOMSTAM (HAND) < HOTMSRME (HAND) < EXCDIST Excessive distance release enabled. Whether frequency hopping is actually enabled or not is not only determined by this ’operator’ flag but also by the system internal flag ISHOPP which is determined system-internally (see next parameter). Moreover. If in a BTS with active baseband FH a TRX-HW (BBSIG. On the other hand.HOPP=TRUE.2000 Eckardt Bertermann. this parameter determines whether the feature 'call release due to excessive distance' is enabled. unit: range: default: 1km 1-35 (for standard cells) 1-100 (for extended cells) 35 (for standard cells) 100 (for extended cells) EEXCDIST=FALSE.TPU or PA) fails or is manually locked the BTSE automatically disables FH systeminternally to make sure that there is no impact on the call quality. EXCDIST=35. FALSE FALSE Frequency hopping enabled. the transmission of SYS_INFO_Type1 messages on the BCCH indicate that FH is used (see also parameter CALL). On recovery of the affected TRX-HW the flag is automatically enabled again and hopping is started with another FREQUENCY REDEFINITION procedure. If the MS-BTS distance is bigger than the value entered for EXCDIST no call setup is possible. if during an ongoing call the MS-BTS distance exeeds the EXCDIST threshold the BTS sends a CONNECTION FAILURE message with cause 'distance limit exceeded' to the BSC and the call is released.g. In this case the parameter H is also H=1! In-system Frequency hopping enabled. FALSE FALSE GSM 04. The info stating whether FH is enabled or not is sent on the main DCCH in the IE ‘Channel Description’ (contained e.08 BTSISHOP=TRUE. If H=0 then frequency hopping is disabled. range: default: Reference: TRUE.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. FALSE FALSE Read-only parameter (only visible with GET BTS PKGBTSO) ! EXCDIST=35.EEXCDIST=FALSE. FREQUENCY REDEFINITION messages are sent to every busy MS in the cell which indicate the new hopping mode (hopping on one TRX only). in the ASSIGNMENT COMMAND and the HANDOVER COMMAND) in form of the parameter H. Attention: From BR3.

Range of PCMS-no. AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion) and HDB3 use 1-signals of alternating polarity (e.licd-port-no. range: licd-no.. D-bit etc. FALSE TRUE BER=E10_3.2) are reserved for fixed PCM link functions (CRC.. E10_3. Bit error rate. > CREATE PCMS: NAME=BSC:0/pcmb:0.g. is 0-19.0 Version 30. determines whether the cyclic redundancy check systems CRC4 (for PCM30 lines) respectively CRC6 (for PCM24 links) is enabled. 'Not Urgent Alarm’ enabled.the bits of the PCM30 ‘Service Word’ (or ‘Non-frame alignment signal’ NFAS). The decimal value entered for this parameter determines . 0-3 (QTLP) CRC=TRUE. E10_5 E10_3 BAF=0. Line code. Although the value range of 0-255 allows to set all 8 bits only the last 5 bits (3.). range: default: TRUE. range: default: 0-255 0 LREDUNEQ=SIMPLEXA. range: default: TRUE. port B can be used in addition to port one for a redundant link. Link redundancy. range: default: 94 / 142 CRC enabled.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. . range: default: PCM link: licd-no. A redundant PCMS link is an additional physical line which is 'hot standby' to take over the traffic and signaling if the currently active one fails. Note: If the link redundancy is set to DUPLEX both traffic and signaling info is transmitted via both links while it is received only via the active one. defines the bit-error-rate threshold that must be exceeded in order to raise a PCM alarm.7) can be set by the BAF parameter as the first 3 bits (0. -1 and +1). 'Not urgent alarms' are signaled using the 5th bit of the NFAS signal (Service Word in timeslot 0 of the PCM system).2000 Creating the PCMS link: < PCMS is the PCM link on the Asub interface. SIMPLEXB DUPLEX SIMPLEXA Bit alignment frame. AMI HDB3 NUA=FALSE. The range for the PCMS-no. TAC3 SBS . range: default: HDB3. 0-8 port-no. HDB3 has additional functions to avoid longer ‘0’ periods by automatic insertion of so-called ‘violation’ bits if a longer ‘0’ period is detected. 0-1 (DTLP) port-no.0! PCML=1-1. SIMPLEXA. Every logical LICD port consists of 2 physical ports A and B. determines the type of signal used on the PCMS. Here LREDUNEQ must be SIMPLEXA/B if a nonredundant PCM link is used and DUPLEX if port B is equipped with a redundant PCM link. extended in BR5. Object path name.convertetd to binary format . E10_4. Eckardt Bertermann. FALSE FALSE CODE=HDB3. In case of failure of the active link the QTLP (BSC) and BSCI (TRAU) immediately change there receive direction. determines whether or not ‘not urgent alarms’ can be signaled.03.

From BR5. this attribute defines the TEI of the LPDLS resp TRAU. this attribute is significant only for PCM24 links.timeslot (. . Object path name. 1-31 (PCM30) timeslot-no. ASUBCH=0-31. not changeable) correspondence to the relative object number of the LPDLS resp.0 on the TEI can be explicitely set for every LPDLS by the parameter TEI. As with this new approach one and the same TEI can be used more than once within a BSC. range: Low bit error rate.0: One PCMS (i. another TRAU specific identity can optionally be used to unambiguously identify the TRAU during the alignment procedure: the Sales Unique Name (see command CREATE TRAU..2000 SINGLE_TRUNK. this attribute is significant only for PCM24 links.63 Terminal endpoint identifier of LPDLS. DOUBLE_TRUNK DOUBLE_TRUNK Working mode. E10_5. BELLCORE CCITT WMOD=DOUBLE_TRUNK. range: 95 / 142 0. E10_4. 0-19 timeslot-no. E10_8. A QTLP port DOUBLE_TRUNK mode: T R A U PCMS 0 B redundant link SINGLE_TRUNK is only allowed if the parameter ASUBENCAP (see SET BSC PKGBSCB) is set to TRUE.03. E10_6. range: default: Version 30.subslot). TAC3 SBS . > CREATE LPDLS: NAME=BSC:0/lpdls:0.e. With this setting it is possible to connect one PCMS to each physical QTLP port SINGLE_TRUNK mode: A QTLP port B PCMS 0 PCMS 1 T R A U T R A U Creating the LPDLS links: < The LPDLS link is the LAPD channel for O&M Information between BSC and TRAU.0 LOWBER=0. parameter SALUNAME). CCITT. E10_3 REMAL=CCITT. Asub channel: pcms-no. Eckardt Bertermann. E10_3.e. E10_9. range: default: default: Remote alarm. The value DOUBLE_TRUNK mode represents the only connection mode which was possible in releases up to BR5.5) the TEI had a fixed (i. one TRAU) can be connected to one port of the selected QTLP port only (REDUNEQ=SIMPLEXAor SIMPLEXB) or one PCMS can be connected redundantly by using both ports (A and B) of the QTLP port (REDUNEQ=DUPLEX). range: pcms-no. 0-3 Range of PCMS-no. 1-24 (PCM24) subslot-no. TRAU and was the only criteria used for the network element identity verification during the alignment procedure. extended in BR5. In previous releases (up to BR4.0! TEI=0..SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. this attribute indicates whether the PCMS works in single trunk mode or in double trunk mode. E10_7.

It can be optionally used for the range: alphanumeric string network element identity verification during the alignment phase in (11 characters + addition to the TEI (see CREATE LPDLS). The TRAU starts this timer if 3 uplink TRAU frames have not been correctly received from the BTSE and it is reset if a correct frame is received again (It is only used if a BTSTRAU traffic connection is established).e. Note: The mapping principle shown in the diagrams only illustrate the basic mapping pattern which is in effect when no pools are created. If it expires. TSYNC. default: NOT_COMPATIBLE_ WITH_CROSSCONNECT.0 Version 30.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. Object path name. This solution is of special interest if the network operator does not rent complete PCM-links for the PCMS but only single timeslots. SALUNAME=”BSC1TRAU0”. this attribute replaces the parameter TRANMTX NOT_COMPATIBLE_WITH_C which was used up to BR4. semipermanent mapping (i. If pools are created the whole mapping pattern changes depending on the type and number of TCH pools configured.2000 Creating the TRAU: CREATE TRAU: NAME=BSC:0/trau:0.0 and defines which mapping system is ROSSCONNECT. For the basic mapping principle please refer to the diagram on the next page. this attribute defines every Network Element by its unique symbolic name. PCMS-no. 96 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann. used between the timeslots of the A.and Asub-interface. Expected SW version. The advantage of this mapping system is that all subslots of the PCMS timeslots can be completely filled even if not all 4 PCMA-links are used between TRAU and MSC. a mapping modifiable by configuration COMPATIBLE_WITH_ commands) which depends on the types and number of TCH pools CROSSCONNECT created on the A-interface. Sales Unique Name. this timer is used by the TRAU to supervise time-out of TRAU frame handling. this SW version must be available and loaded in the TRAU. the TRAU reports a transcoder failure warning to the BSC. parameter range: NOT_COMPATIBLE_ ENPOOL) the previously rigid mapping of timeslots is replaced by a WITH_CROSSCONNECT. Since the introduction of the feature ‘pooling’ (see PKG BSCB. a) The value NOT_COMPATIBLE_WITH_CROSS_CONNECT value can be chosen when no cross-connectors between BSC and TRAU are used (corresponds to the previous ‘TRAU matrix type 1’).5) the (LPDLS-)TEI was the only criteria used for the network default: NOT_DEFINED element identity verification during the alignment procedure. unit: range: default: 10ms 10-10000 100 EXPSWV= "02-04-01-02-06-00 _98-07-30". PCMSN=0.03. TAC3 SBS . ALLCRIT= Allocation criteria. For the basic mapping principle please refer to the diagram on the next page.0! TSYNC=1000. The new approach using the Sales Unique Name in addition to an individually configurable TEI allows a much higher flexibility in the allocation of the TRAUs to the BSCs without loss of savety. b) COMPATIBLE_WITH_CROSS_CONNECT value has to be chosen when cross-connectors between BSC annd TRAU are used (corresponds to the previous ‘TRAU matrix type 2’). In previous releases (up NULL terminated) to BR4. range: 0-19 Range extended in BR5. If it is not available the TRAU automatically requests a download of this SW version from the BSC..

3 OMAL PCMS. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 T R PCMT-2 31 .. 3 2 1 0 Note: TRAU Matrix type 1: If a specific timeslot on PCMT-0 is used for CCS7 and OMAL the corresponding timeslots on all other PCMTs connected to the same TRAU remain empty..21.. If timeslot N on the PCMS is created as LPDLS then the corresponding timeslot N on all other PCMTs is empty as well. TAC3 SBS .27 * not usable timeslots on PCMS: timeslot 7. OMAL and LPDLS all PCMA-timeslots that are mapped to the selected PCMS timeslot cannot be used and remain empty. 31 are not usable ! Note: TRAU Matrix type 2: If specific timeslots on the PCMS are used for CCS7. In addition... The following example may illustrate a useful solution: Channel type Used timeslot on Asub Used timeslots on A interface Not usable timeslots on A interface CCS7 link PCMS.. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PCMS-0 PCMT-1 31 . 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ts 31 ts 2 ts 1 ts 0 3 2 1 0 . 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 A X PCMS-0 U PCMT-3 31 30 29 28 27 .. timeslots 24. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PCMT-1 31 . timeslot 31 none PCMT-3. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ts 31 3 2 1 0 . -2 and -3 LPDLS PCMS... timeslot 30 timeslot 30 on PCMT-1.2. 27 26 25 24 . Channel type Used timeslot on Asub Used timeslots on A interface Not usable timeslots on A interface CCS7 link PCMS. timeslot 25 * PCMT-0. subslot 1 (CCS7 link). timeslot 25 PCMT-3. 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 x A ts 2 ts 1 X ts 0 U PCMT-3 31 .22..25. timeslots 20. timeslots (0). subslot 2 97 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann.03.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.0 Version 30. 17 and 25 ! timeslots 28 . timeslot 16 timeslot 16 on PCMT-1.. -2 and -3 OMAL PCMS. timeslot 30 PCMT-3. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 T R PCMT-2 31 ..2000 Basic TRAU-mapping 1: NOT_COMPATIBLE_WITH_CROSSCONNECT (no pools created) PCMT-0 31 .26. timeslot 30 PCMT-0.1.. timeslot 8. The following example configuration has the advantage that all ‘non-usable’ A-interface-timeslots are concentrated on one PCMT link (here: PCMT-3).23 LPDLS PCMS. 9.. timeslot 31 none timeslot 31 on PCMT-0. timeslot 16 PCMT-0. the PCMS-subslot mapped to the used PCMT timeslot will remain empty. -2 and -3 Basic TRAU-mapping 2: COMPATIBLE_WITH_CROSSCONNECT (no pools created) PCMT-0 31 . The timeslot number used for CCS7 link and the OMAL on the A-interface corresponds to the one on the PCMS. -1. timeslot 30 * PCMT-0. 2 1 0 subslot 0 remains empty in timeslots 1.

E10_4. defines the bit-error-rate threshold that must be exceeded in order to raise a PCM alarm.no. Remote alarm. parameter structure: trau-no. range: default: 0-2047 (if CICFM=GSM) 0-2730 (if CICFM=NOTSTRUCT) pcma-no. this attribute is significant only for PCM24 links. Bit error rate. PCMT=0-0.2) are reserved for fixed PCM link functions (CRC.the bits of the PCM30 ‘Service Word’ (or ‘Non-frame alignment signal’ NFAS). LOWBER=0.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. E10_8.: 0-9 pcm-link-no.0 Version 30. The decimal value entered for this parameter determines . The range for the PCMA-no. E10_5.2000 Creating the PCMA link: < PCMA represents the PCM link on the A interface. determines the type of signal used on the PCMS.03. determines whether or not ‘not urgent alarms’ can be signaled. The last 5 bits identify the timeslot (0-31). E10_5 E10_3 BAF=0. E10_9. E10_3. range: default: default: 98 / 142 ‘Not Urgent Alarm’ enabled. Object path name. determines whether the cyclic redundancy check systems CRC4 (for PCM30) respectively CRC6 (for PCM24) is enabled. this attribute is significant only for PCM24 links. range: Line code. TAC3 SBS . 'Not urgent alarms' are signaled using the 5th bit of the NFAS signal (Service Word in timeslot 0 of the PCM system).). > CREATE PCMA: NAME=BSC:0/pcma:0. E10_6.: 0-3 CRC=TRUE. High part of the CIC.g. the first 11 bits are used to identify the PCM-link (0-2047). Low bit error rate. E10_3 REMAL=0. FALSE FALSE CODE=HDB3. CCITT BELLCORE CCITT Eckardt Bertermann. E10_7. is 0-79. PCM TRAU.convertetd to binary format . The HCICN determines the value of the first 11 bits. -1 and +1). The range of the parameter values depends on the setting of the parameter CICFM (see SET BSC PKGBSCB).. Bit alignment frame. . range: default: TRUE. E10_4. AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion) and HDB3 use 1-signals of alternating polarity (e. FALSE TRUE BER=E10_3. D-bit etc.. of the PCM link between TRAU and MSC range: trau-no. E10_3. range: default: CRC enabled.7) can be set by the BAF parameter as the first 3 bits (0. Although the value range of 0-255 allows to set all 8 bits only the last 5 bits (3. The CIC (circuit identification code) is a 16bitstring used to address the PCMA-timeslot used for a traffic connection. range: default: TRUE. range: default: HDB3. HDB3 has additional functions to avoid longer ‘0’ periods by automatic insertion of so-called ‘violation’ bits if a longer ‘0’ period is detected. AMI HDB3 NUA=FALSE. range: default: 0-255 0 HCICN=0.

5 kbit/s) HSCSD max 4 x FR data (14. Supported channels and speech coding algorithms FR speech version 1 FR data (12.6 kbit/s) FR speech version 2 FR data (12. 3.6 kbit/s) HSCSD max 2 x FR data (14. 3. POOL_13. 3.5. 6. 3.6 kbit/s) HSCSD max 4 x FR data (12..0 DEFPOOLTYP= NOT_DEFINED.6 kbit/s) HR speech HR data (6. 3. 3. 3. 3.6 kbit/s) HSCSD max 2 x FR data (12.6 kbit/s) FR speech version 1 FR speech version 2 FR data (12.6 kbit/s) FR data (12. TAC3 SBS ..6 kbit/s) HSCSD max 4 x FR data (14.5. 6.6 kbit/s) HR speech version 1 HR data (6. 6. 3. 3.5 kbit/s) FR data (14. 3.03. 3. 6.6. 3. 6 kbit/s) FR data (14. 3. 6. 3.6.5. 12.6 kbit/s) FR speech version 1 FR data (12. The different values for the pooling type are predefined and represent a certain combination of different ‘supported coding types’ for speech and data (see also parameter ENPOOL (SET BSC PKGBSCB)).6 kbit/s) HR data (6. this parameter defines the default type of pool assigned to every TSLA of the given PCMA. 3. POOL_21.6 kbit/s) HSCSD max 2 x FR data (12. 3. POOL_22 NOT_DEFINED Pool Circuit pool number 1 Circuit pool number 2 Circuit pool number 3 Circuit pool number 4 Circuit pool number 5 Circuit pool number 6 Circuit pool number 7 Circuit pool number 8 Circuit pool number 9 Circuit pool number 10 Circuit pool number 11 Circuit pool number 12 Circuit pool number 13 Circuit pool number 15 Circuit pool number 16 Circuit pool number 17 Circuit pool number 18 Circuit pool number 19 99 / 142 Version 30.5.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. 6..6 kbit/s) FR speech version 1 FR speech version 2 FR data (12. 6. range: default: NOT_DEFINED POOL_1.5 kbit/s) HSCSD max 2 x FR data (14.6 kbit/s) FR speech version 1 FR speech version 2 FR data (12. POOL_2. 3.6.6 kbit/s) HSCSD max 4 x FR data (12. For the different pooling types defined by GSM please refer to the table below.6 kbit/s) HR speech version 1 HR data (6.6.6 kbit/s) HR speech version 1 HR data (6.6 kbit/s) HR data (6. 3.6 kbit/s) HR speech version 1 HR data (6.6 kbit/s) FR data (14.6 kbit/s) HR speech version 1 HR data (6. 12.. 3.6 kbit/s) HR data (6. 3.6 kbit/s) FR speech version 1 FR speech version 2 FR data (12. 6.6 kbit/s) FR speech version 2 FR data (12.6 kbit/s) HSCSD max 2 x FR data (12.6 kbit/s) HSCSD max 4 x FR data (12. 3. 12.6 kbit/s) FR data (12. 12.6 kbit/s) HR data (6. 6 kbit/s) Eckardt Bertermann. POOL_15.2000 Default pool type.

5. Note: This parameter is not generated by the DBAEM. range: 1-31 (PCM30) 1-24 (PCM24) VOLUL=15. 12. For the different pooling types see the table above. Object path name.5. determines the value for the timeslot volume in the downlink (MSC -> MS) direction.2000 Supported channels and speech coding algorithms FR speech version 1 FR speech version 2 FR data (14. Eckardt Bertermann. The setting of VOLUL to 15 is used by some network operators because this setting was found the most suitable with respect to the subjective perception of test callers.5.6 kbit/s) HSCSD max 4 x FR data (14. 1dB 0-24 12 = normal link level 0 = 12dB attenuation 24 = 12dB amplification 12 POOLTYP=NOT_DEFINED.0 Pool Circuit pool number 20 Circuit pool number 21 Circuit pool number 22 Version 30. 12. POOL_22 NOT_DEFINED Pool type.. determines the value for the timeslot volume in the uplink (MS -> MSC) direction. this parameter defines the type of pool assigned to the TSLA (see also parameters DEFPOOLTYP (SET PCMA) and ENPOOL (SET BSC PKGBSCB)). It is relevant if the command is entered from a user terminal. stepsize: range: default: default: 100 / 142 Volume uplink. TAC3 SBS . Volume downlink.6 kbit/s) FR speech version 1 FR speech version 2 FR data (14. THROUGH=31. NOT_DEFINED POOL_1. 3. 6 kbit/s) FR speech version 1 FR speech version 2 FR data (14..6 kbit/s) HR speech version 1 HR data (6. POOL_21. 12.6 kbit/s) HR speech version 1 HR data (6. POOL_13. POOL_2. range: Timeslot range. POOL_15.03. 3. 3. 6. 12. 6 kbit/s) Setting the uplink and downlink volumes for specific PCMA timeslots: SET TSLA: NAME=BSC:0/pcma:0/tsla:1. 6.6 kbit/s) HSCSD max 2 x FR data (14. 3.5.. 3..6 kbit/s) HR speech version 1 HR data (6.5. 6. offers the possibility to set the attribute values for a group of timeslots. stepsize: range: default: 1dB 0-24 12 = normal link level 0 = 12dB attenuation 24 = 12dB amplification 12 VOLDL=12. 3. 12.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.

0 Version 30. SS7 MTP type. MAPMSC. If this procedure is enabled.3bit . determines the type of message transfer part used by the SS7. Eckardt Bertermann. TAC3 SBS . normally all network elements are addressed with one unique SPC valid for NAT0. range: default: 101 / 142 Signaling Point Code. this flag determines whether the periodic signaling link test is enabled for the SPC-OPC relation or not.). determines which SCCP subsystem number is used for the BSSAP. range: (binary format) (decimal format) see above (OPC) SS7MTPTYP=CCITT. For CCITT the conversion from decimal format to the new format is done in the following way: Convert decimal value to Hex.001 . > Object path name. BSSAP subsystem number. NAT 1 (CCITT) NAT0 (ANSI) NAT0 BSSAPSSN=254. Example for conversion of a structured SPC to the decimal format: SPC = 12 . from BR4. OPC=219-48. range: Network Cluster Member 0-255 (CCITT) 1-255 (ANSI) Network Cluster 0-63 (CCITT) 0-255 (ANSI) Network Identifier NO_CONFIG (CCITT) 1-254 (ANSI) < Basic CCS7 level 3 addresses. the 2 most significant bits make up the ‘Network Cluster’.03. INAT1. The network indicator is an SS7 level 3 address supplement and is always sent together with the SPC in the level 3 component of an SS7 message. For the BSSAP.5 on the value of the SPC must be in entered in the format “NetwokClusterMember – NetworkCluster – NetworkIndetifier”. (Format: see parameter OPC). which have to be addressed by an own number within the SCCP addressing scheme. ANSI CCITT NTWIND=2.3bit SPC = 1100 . CCITT. range: default: INAT0.g. the 2 least significant digits (converted to decimal) make up the ‘Network Cluster Member’. determines the logical network the entered SPCs are valid for.11 .4bit .2000 Creating the CCS7 level 3 addresses of BSC and MSC: CREATE OPC PKGOPCP: NAME=BSC:0/opc:0. Example: SPC = 12507dec = 30DBhex DBhex = 219dec = NetworkClusterMember value 30hex = 48dec = NetworkCluster value Result: OPC=219-48 In the MSC the SPC might be entered in structured format. identifies the SPC of the MSC.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. Own Signaling Point Code. NAT0. BSSAP. MAPHLR etc. SIGNALLING LINK TEST messages are periodically transmitted from the BSC to the MSC to continuously check the availability of the remote (MSC-) SPC. FALSE TRUE Network Indicator. range: default: (structured format) TRUE. SCCP subsystems are Application Parts of the SCCP (like e.3 4bit .011 SPC = 11000011011011 SPC = 12507 SPC=48-144.1011 . Within one network. Up to BR4. range: default: 15-255 254 PERTFLAG=TRUE. Periodic Signaling Link Test flag.1 . The other possible values are normally used for network transitions. the SSN is not fixed and can thus be selected by command.0 the value of the SPC had to be in entered in decimal format. identifies the SPC of the BSC.

remote congestion timer. excessive delay of acknowledgement timer. unit: range: default: default: 102 / 142 M2T6. known as T7_timer_id in the CCITT blue book. known as T3_timer_id in the CCITT blue book. unit: range: default: 100ms CCITT: 50-1500 ANSI: 50-300 CCITT: 1000 ANSI: 120 M2T3=10. ‘alignment ready’ timer. TAC3 SBS . Object path name. unit: range: default: 100ms CCITT: 400-500 ANSI: 129-160 CCITT: 450 ANSI: 140 M2T2=1000. 100ms CCITT: 5-20 ANSI: 5-20 CCITT: 20 ANSI: 10 Eckardt Bertermann. normal proving period timer. unit: range: default: M2T4N. known as T5_timer_id in the CCITT blue book. known as T4e timer in the CCITT/ITU book. known as T1_timer_id in the CCITT blue book. ‘not aligned’ timer. 100ms CCITT: 10-15 ANSI: 50-140 CCITT: 10 ANSI: 120 M2T4N=80. emergency proving period timer. SIB sending timer. unit: range: M2T4E.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. known as T6_timer_id in the CCITT blue book. unit: range: M2T3. known as T2_timer_id in the CCITT blue book. unit: range: default: default: default: M2T5. ‘aligned’ timer. 100ms CCITT: 30-60 ANSI: 10-60 CCITT: 60 ANSI: 50 M2T7=20. unit: range: M2T2. M2T7.0 Version 30. 100ms 1-2 1 M2T6=60. 100ms CCITT: 4-5 ANSI: 4-7 CCITT: 5 ANSI: 6 M2T5=1.2000 Setting the timer values for CCS7 MTP level 2: SET OPC PKGMTL2: NAME=BSC:0/opc:0.03. known as T4n timer in the CCITT/ITU book. 100ms CCITT: 75-95 ANSI: 15-30 CCITT: 80 ANSI: 24 M2T4E=5. M2T1. M2T1=450.

known as T1_timer in the CCITT blue book. ANSI: 14 Eckardt Bertermann. Up to BR4. M3T1. this parameter determines the percentage of receive buffers used. unit: range: default: 1% 0-6 0 SANTIME=10. known as T2_timer in the CCITT blue book. If the M3T1TM expires for two consecutive times the SS7L restoration procedure is started. that can be buffered for retransmission. unit: range: default: 103 / 142 M3T1M. Setting the timer values for CCS7 MTP level 3: SET OPC PKGMTL3: NAME=BSC:0/opc:0.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. Sanity timer. range: default: 2000-4000 3000 Maximum number of MSU available for retransmission. M3T1=9. wait for CO acknowledgement.. Error correction method. Object path name.0 this timer was implemented in the system with hardcoded values. range: default: 100-127 110 N2 =3000. this parameter determines the value of the sanity timer used to control the level 2 processor (PPCC) outage. 100ms 7-20 CCITT: 13. unit: range: default: 1% 0-9 3 CONGTH=0. unit: range: default: 100ms 40-120 CCITT:100.0 FLOWCTH=3. this parameters determines the maximum number of SS7 message signal units (MSU). If after having sent a test link message to the MSC a test link acknowledge message is not received by the BSC within M3T1TM the BSC restarts the test link procedure. This timer controls the test link procedure on the SS7 link.03. this parameters determines the maximum number SS7 MSU octets that can be buffered for retransmission. M3T2. unit: range: default: 100ms 5-12 9 M3T1TM=100. Maximum number of MSU octets available for retransmission. Supervision timer for signalling link test acknowledgment message. range: default: Version 30. Congestion control threshold. TAC3 SBS . range: BASIC_ERROR_CORRECTION PREVENTIVE_CYCLIC_ RETRANS_ERR_CORR default: BASIC_ERROR_CORRECTION N1 =110. 0-255 0 = timer disabled 10 ERRCORMTD =BASIC_ERROR_ CORRECTION. at which layer 2 requests load reduction measures from layer 3 or subsequently discards messages. this parameter determines the layer-2 error correction principle used on the SS7 links. ANSI:50 M3T2=13. at which layer 2 requests load reduction measures from layer 3. delay to avoid the out-of-sequence of messages on CO (CO = changeover of links in case of link failure or blocking). this parameter determines the percentage of transmit buffers used.2000 Flow control threshold.

0 this timer was implemented in the system with hardcoded values. wait for inhibit acknowledgement. 100ms 20-30 CCITT: 20. known as T4_timer in the CCITT blue book. This timer (T23 for CCITT or T21 for ANSI) controls the remote inhibit test procedure. unit: range: default: M3T14. M3T5. Up to BR4.0 this timer was called M3T22. Local inhibit test timer. This timer activated during the ss7l restoration phase controls the disable state of the SS7L. known as T13_timer in the CCITT blue book. ANSI:17 M3T3=9. M3T23OR21. ANSI: 10 M3T13=8. Eckardt Bertermann. diversion delay controlled by a timer.0 this timer was called M3T23. known as T17_timer in the CCITT blue book. 100ms 8-15 10 M3T19=9. delay to avoid oscillation of the initial alignment. M3T12=12. unit: range: default: 5s CCITT: 36-72 ANSI: 18-24 CCITT: 36. ANSI: 29 M3T17=10. known as T3_timer in the CCITT blue book. wait to force uninhibit. unit: range: default: M3T2M. Up to BR4. unit: range: default: M3T12. wait for CB acknowledgement second attempt. wait for CB acknowledgement first attempt (CB = changeback to original link after link failure or blocking end). 100ms 8-15 CCITT: 12. The periodic test link is started on all SS7L every time that the M3T2TM expires. known as T5_timer in the CCITT blue book. known as T14_timer in the CCITT blue book.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. If the restoration time is greater than M3T19 a sisable transition is sent to lmt /omc. Failed link craft referral timer. unit: range: default: 100ms 5-12 8 5s 12-120 CCITT: 12 M3T22OR20=36. If the SS7L is remote inhibited a remote inhibit test is sent to the MSC every M3T23OR21 time. Up to BR4. This timer (T22 for CCITT or T20 for ANSI) controls the local inhibit test procedure.0 this timer was implemented in the system with hardcoded values. ANSI: 29 M3T14=4. ANSI: 22 M3T19. This timer controls the periodic test link procedures.2000 5s CCITT: 36-72 ANSI: 18-24 CCITT: 36. Remote inhibit test timer. known as T12_timer in the CCITT blue book. M3T3. wait for uninhibit acknowledgement. If the SS7L is local inhibited a local inhibit test is sent to the MSC every M3t22OR20 seconds. unit: range: default: 104 / 142 M3T17. Interval timer for sending periodic link test message. unit: range: default: 100ms 5-12 9 100ms 5-12 8 M3T5=8.03. unit: range: default: M3T4. unit: range: default: 5s 6-18 CCITT: 6. unit: range: default: M3T13. Up to BR4. TAC3 SBS . M3T22OR20. unit: range: default: Version 30. ANSI: 22 M3T23OR21=36. 100ms 8-15 CCITT: 8. M3T4=8.0 M3T2TM=6.

In order to prevent the MSC from releasing the SCCP connections the TIAR timer of the MSC should be more than 2 times as big as the one from the BSC. The RELEASE COMPLETE is the confirmation message for the RELEASED message which is sent if an SCCP conection is cleared down.5s 0-255 20 TGUARD=36. Note: After a TDPC switch the timers TIAS and TIAR are reset to ‘0’.e. busy CICs will not be released. The same timer also exists in the MSC. this timer determines the waiting time for the CONNECTION CONFIRM.0 Version 30. The SCCP connection is released if there are no inactivity test messages received within the TIAR interval. SMS-transmission. which is used to set up a logical SCCP dialog using so-called ‘local references’ on the Ainterface. It is started when the last SS7link goes down and it is stopped when the first link is completely aligned again. this timer determines the waiting time for RELEASE COMPLETE message. unit: range: default: 105 / 142 5s 0-255 36 Inactivity test send timer. existing speech connections will be saved and no RESET message will be sent on the A-interface. unit: range: default: 0. To save existing calls for a defined period of SS7-link interruption the timer values at the BSC and MSC should be equal. Notes: a) If a link interruption shorter than TGUARD timer value occurs. Location Update etc. TAC3 SBS . Eckardt Bertermann. unit: range: default: 5s 0-255 3 TIAS=96. Object path name. Such a ‘local reference’ connection is set up for every transaction (call. A recommended value is 50 seconds. this timer determines the periodicity of the sending of inactivity test messages on a connection section. Please see also the parameter TIAS.03.). Guard timer.2000 Setting the SCCP timers: SET OPC PKGSCCP: NAME=BSC:0/opc:0. If a link interruption longer than TGUARD occurs the existing speech connections will be released and after the link realignment a RESET message will be sent on the A-interface. c) TGUARD must be set according to the following rule: TGUARD > ALARMT2 (CREATE LICD) + TSBS This setting is necessary in order to avoid A-interface reset (and thus call release) procedures even if the link interruption is very short. Inactivity test receive timer. Note: The following rule should be considered: TIAR (of the receiving entity) > 2∗TIAS (of the sending entity) Release timer. unit: range: default: 5s 0-255 96 TIAR=180. b) In order to avoid the loss of existing calls in case of a TDPC switch (which causes an initialization of the SS7-link) TGUARD has to be set to a value bigger than 30 seconds. The same timer also exists in the MSC. i. unit: range: default: 5s 0-255 180 TREL=20. Under certain conditions it may happen that no inactivity test message is sent towards the MSC for more than 2 times of the TIAS interval. TCONN=3. The CONNECTION CONFIRM is the response to the CONNECTION REQUEST.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. It is used to supervise the adjacent signaling point inaccessability. this parameter sets the waiting time to resume normal procedures for the temporary connection sections during the restart procedure. Timer for CC.

unit: range: default: 0. defines the number of the link on the A interface. manufacturer dependent timer. If the BSC receives the SST from the MSC before expiry of TSBS it answers with SSA and immediately sends the SST towards the MSC. On expiry of this timer the BSC sends the SST (SCCP Subsystem Test) towards the MSC and waits for the SSA (SCCP Subsystem Available) message.timeslot-no. wait to report the abnormal release to the maintenance function..03. TAC3 SBS . unit: range: default: State information timer.: 0-3 TSLA=0-16. pcma-no.port-no. TWCUSER.: 0-1 port-no. With this message the local SCCP (in the BSC) checks the availability of the remote SCCP subsystem BSSAP (in the MSC). ppcc-no.0 TSBS=60. .ALARMT2 (CREATE LICD) This setting is necessary in order to avoid A-interface reset (and thus call release) procedures even if the link interruption is very short.5s 0-255 60 TWCUSER=20. Signaling Link Code. Note: TSBS must be set according to the following rule: TSBS < TGUARD . LNKA=0-0. 0. Link access.: 0-39 timeslot-no. 5s 0-255 36 Creating the CCS7 link: CREATE SS7L: NAME=BSC:0/ss7l:0. unit: range: default: Version 30. 0-15 Eckardt Bertermann. range: pcma-no. This timer is started by the BSC if after an interruption of the CCS7 link the lower layers have come up again.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.: 1-31 (PCM30) 1-24 (PCM24) SLC=0. . range: 106 / 142 Link on the A interface. The same mechanism is used in the MSC. Object path name.5s 0-255 20 TINT=36. describes the physical port. range: ppcc-no..2000 TINT.

is 0-1. indicates if the IXLT internal clock is used or a external one. range: default: Clock synchronizing modality. TAC3 SBS . range: default: INTERNAL. Range extended in BR5.0 as preparation for BR5. > CREATE X25D: NAME=BSC:0/x25d:0. i. BAUD_9600. Data terminal equipment/data communication equipment.2000 Creating an X25 connection via dedicated link: < Note: The objects X25D and X25A are mutually exclusive. The range for the X25D-no. is 0-1. Baud rate of communication between OMC and BSS.0 as preparation for BR5. Object path name. Parameter format: pcma-no.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. The range for the X25A-no.5! ACHAN=0-30. Object path name. Range extended in BR5.e either an X25A is created or an X25D >. DTE. CREATE X25A: NAME=BSC:0/x25a:0. i.: 1-31 (PCM30) 1-24 (PCM24) A interface channel. BAUD_38400.0 Version 30. range: default: BAUD_4800. identifies the timeslot on the A interface used for the OMC connection. It is necessary with CLOCK=INTERNAL.0! 107 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann.timeslot-no.. determines whether the BSC is configured as DTE or as DCE.5! CLOCK=EXTERNAL.03.: 0-79 timeslot-no.e either an X25A is created or an X25D. BAUD_64000 BAUD_64000 DTEDCE=DTE. EXTERNAL EXTERNAL BAUDRATE=BAUD_64000. Range extended in BR5. If CLOCK=EXTERNAL the parameter is not relevant. DCE DTE Creating an X25 connection via A-interface: < Note: The objects X25D and X25A are mutually exclusive. range: pcma-no. .

L2PV=ISO7776.0 Version 30. <Setting the OSI parameters for the ‘X25A’ objects> Object path name. TAC3 SBS .cfg . range: default: Retry number.> SET X25D: or SET X25A: <Setting the OSI parameters for the ‘X25D’ objects> NAME=BSC:0/x25a:0. 100ms 1-3000 150 T4=650. unit: range: default: Line circuit number of 1st 2-way channel. range: default: Layer 2 window size.2000 Setting the layer 2 and layer 3 OSI parameters for the X25 connection: < Note: If an object ‘X25D’ was created the command is SET X25D. In the OMC the relevant OMP specification for the link parameters is stored in: /etc/opt/SUNWconn/x25/config/link_config_*. Call request timeout.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.03. 1-7 7 LCN2WC=1. DDNTW ISO7776 T1=150. unit: range: default: Timer T4. 100ms 0-3000 2000 Eckardt Bertermann. unit: range: default: Timer T1. For both commands the OSI parameters are exactly the same. range: default: ISO7776. range: default: 108 / 142 Restart request timeout. GENPDN. range: default: 1-254 10 L2WIN=7. 1-7 7 T20=1800. unit: range: default: Layer 3 window size. If an object ‘X25A’ was created the command is SET X25A. 0-4095 1 L3WIN=7. 100ms 0-3000 1800 T21=2000. Layer 2 protocol variant. Rule: T4 ≥ T1∗ 3 100ms 0-9000 650 RETRY=10.

alphanumeric string of 10 characters parameter skipped Eckardt Bertermann. _512.2000 . unit: range: default: Registration request timeout. _2048 PACKET_2048 (TRACE=TRACE). range: default: Clear request retry count. range: default: Restart request retry count. PACKET_128. unit: range: default: Clear request timeout. range: default: Reset request retry count. range: Layer 3 protocol variant. ISO8208VER84 ISO8208VER84 FCTRL=YES. 1-255 3 L3PV=ISO8208VER84. 1-255 3 R23=3. YES. 100ms 0-3000 1800 T28=0. DDN1980. NO YES L3PS=PACKET_2048. range: default: Interrupt request timeout. unit: range: default: Reset request timeout. _1024. TAC3 SBS Version 30.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. 100ms 0-3000 1800 T26=1800. ISO8208VER80. Debugging coded string. 100ms 0-3000 0 R20=3. range: default: default: default: 109 / 142 Network layer packet size. PDN1980. _256.03. 1-255 3 R22=3. unit: range: default: 100ms 0-3000 1800 T23=1800.0 T22=1800. range: Flow control negotiation.

2000 Creating the OMC connection: CREATE OMAL: NAME=BSC:0/omal:0. The range for the CBCL-no. 0-7 DISTRICT=0.If an INTERNAL_CBC is created then the X121ADDR must be equal to the one created for the OMAL! . Range extended in BR5. X25D X25D X121ADDR="514501". range: X25 link type. X25D X25D X121ADDR="514501". 0-47 Creating the link for the external connection to the SMS-CB system: CREATE CBCL: NAME=BSC:0/cbcl:0. indicates whether the X25 link is realized via dedicated link (X25D) or via an A-interface channel (X25A). Notes: .33 characters) NULL terminated ###BOT_TEXT### REGION=0. indicates whether the X25 link is realized via dedicated link (X25D) or via an A-interface channel (X25A). is 0-1. is 0-1. range: Region.5! CBCLTYPE=CBC_INTERNAL. identifies the district where the BSC is located. Notes: .determines the remote X121 address used in the X25 network. Type of CBC link.33 characters) NULL terminated ###BOT_TEXT### X25 link type. Object path name. range: X121 address. numeric string (max. The range for the OMAL-no.0 as preparation for BR5. range: default: X25A.If an INTERNAL_CBC is created then the LINKTYPE must be equal to the one created for the OMAL! X121 address.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. range: District. range: default: X25A. Object path name.0 as preparation for BR5.If an EXTERNAL_CBC is created then the X121ADDR must be from the one created for the OMAL! Eckardt Bertermann. 0-49 BSSNAME=1.5! LINKTYPE=X25D. . connected to the BSC via an own X25 link (EXTERNAL_CBC). determines whether the SMS-CB system is realized in the OMC-B (INTERNAL_CBC) or as an external system range: CBC_INTERNAL.determines the remote X121 address used in the X25 network. identifies the BSS. TAC3 SBS .0 Version 30. default: CBC_EXTERNAL CBC_EXTERNAL LINKTYPE=X25D. range: 110 / 142 numeric string (max.03. BSS name. identifies the region where the BSC is located. Range extended in BR5.

<pcm-link>-<timeslot no. range: < SYNC . determines the second timeslot to be interconnected by the nailed-up connection.> The ‘pcm-link’ is entered by the object instance name of the PCMA.: 0-31 (for PCM30) 1-24 (for PCM24) TOTERM=PCMB:4-17. PCMS:19 timeslot-no. CREATE NUC: NAME=BSC:0/nuc:0...5.2000 Defining the BSC reference synchronization clock origin: CREATE SYNC: NAME=BSC:0/sync:0. PCMB:34 or PCMS:0. PCMS or PCMB object pcm-link: PCMA:0. FRTERM=PCMA:3-3. 0-19 Range extended in BR5. Object path name.0 Version 30. determines the first timeslot to be interconnected by the nailed-up connection. PCMA:79 or PCMB:0. format: range: <pcm-link>-<timeslot no.synchronization-clock-no. PCMS or PCMB object pcm-link: PCMA:0. PCMA:79 or PCMB:0. From terminal.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. PCMS:19 timeslot-no.. format: range: 111 / 142 To terminal.0! Creating a Nailed-Up Connection through the BSC/TRAU: < This command is used to create a permanently switched connection between two timeslots on PCM links connected to the BSS.. PCMS object. a PCMS or a PCMB.0 and does not appear in the databases generated by DBAEM. TAC3 SBS . PCMSOBJ=0. PCMB:34 or PCMS:0. identifies the number of the PCMS link from which the reference clock signal is retrieved.03. These permanently connected timeslots can be located on a PCMA. Thus the SBS network elements BSC and TRAU can assume the function of a crossconnector (DXC). > Object path name..> The ‘pcm-link’ is entered by the object instance name of the PCMA. > Note: This command was prepared in advance for BR5.. It is not in effect for BR5.: 0-31 (for PCM30) 1-24 (for PCM24) Eckardt Bertermann.

the file is decompressed and converted to ASCII format.0 Version 30. Object path name. Specific commands have to be entered in the SIEMENS MSC to activate the feature generally (MOD MSERVREL and MOD MSERVOPT) and for a specific IMSI (ACT IMSITRAC). The trace file is compressed and automatically uploaded to the OMC. The operator is informed about the trace start by an appropriate notification. subscribers complain about the quality in a specific network area) IMSI tracing might be started for the IMSI of the affected subscriber or a tester may travel through this area performing test calls with a test SIM card while IMSI tracing is active. RECCRI=NOCRITERIA. TAC3 SBS .2000 Activating IMSI tracing in the BSC: <The feature IMSI Tracing allows the BSC to trace all signalling transactions of any call or a short message transfer performed by a specific subscriber (represented by his IMSI). if an MS with the IMSI under test performs any call transaction. Note: With respect to the number of simultaneous traces managable by the BSC also the feature ‘Cell Traffic Recording’ has to be considered. > CREATE TRACE: NAME=BSC:0/trace:0. Thus the ASCII trace file. which is triggered by the message ‘TraceStartedNotification’ sent by the BSC to the OMC and to the LMT. transaction is ready for analysis. At the end of the call.g. range: 112 / 142 NOCRITERIA Eckardt Bertermann. describes the criteria in which the traces are collected by the BSC. If a particular problem appears in an network-area (e. This feature is foreseen for a limited number of subscribers to be traced and has to be activated in the MSC for specific IMSIs (up to 7 subscribers can be traced at the same time within one BSC). As a result. For further details please refer to the descriptions provided for the command CREATE CTRSCHED. parameter IMSIFSIZ). The maximum number of simultaneous (IMSI and CTR) traces is restricted to 16. the BSC and the BTS stop the trace data collection and the BSC informs the OMC/LMT using the ‘StoppedTraceNotification’. the MSC instructs the BSC to start the recording of the call events (using the BSSMAP message MSC INVOKE TRACE). which contains all messages and events related to the traced call. subscriber related) while CTR is cell related. In the OMC. The BSC sends the RSL Abis message START TRACE to the BTS which starts the sending of the up. Record criteria.and downlink measurements measured during the call by the MS and the BTS in form of the socalled TRACE MEASUREMENT RESULTS. The BSC collects the trace data and stores in a special directory on the BSC disk (see command SET BSC PKGBSCC. In the BSC. The difference between IMSI tracing and the CTR feature is that IMSI tracing is IMSI related (resp. the feature is generally activated by the CREATE TRACE command.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.03.

Operational state: If operational state of the CTRCO object is ‘enabled’ the CTR tracing activity is possible. the CTR files only start recording the events during the ‘TCH assigned’ phase. It is not in effect for BR5. When all active traces are terminated the administrative state automatically changes to ‘locked’ value.e. Note: Also the CTRSCHED object can be locked. Administrative state: The OMT/LMT operator is able to stop all the trace sessions on a BSC through the setting of the administrative state to 'locked'. In the OMC the files are converted to ASCII so that they are ready for analysis. This could be necessary if subscriber complaints or PM data point to problems in a specific cell or if a newly installed cell is to be observed for correct behavior. Thus CTR allows the operator to simultaneously observe the system's behavior and its immediate effects on calls within the cell. > Note: This command was prepared in advance for BR5. in case of forced termination due to an IMSI trace invocation (see MACONN) or in case of inter-BSC HO. The CTR control object (CTRCO) assumes the state management functions of all CTRSCHED objects. if it is ‘disabled’ the BSC cannot start CTR any trace activities due to abnormal conditions (e. to better monitor the system’s behavior and the quality of service. TAC3 SBS . call transactions in the ‘signalling only’ phase (SDCCH phase) are not recorded. neither a trace invocation is received from the MSC nor is the MSC informed about any cell tracing activities. However. Usage state: The usage state of the CTRControl object reports the information related to the capacity of the BSC to trace another call: the ‘idle’ value means that no trace is running on that BSC. while IMSI traces record complete BSC-controlled inter-cell handover procedures within one trace. so it is.0 and does not appear in the databases generated by DBAEM. Eckardt Bertermann. As for tracing sessions there is no difference between IMSI and CTR Trace. but no new connections are traced. ‘busy’ means that the maximum number of trace sessions (maximum 16 per BSC) has been reached and no more tracing sessions are possible.and quality-of-service related system data such as performance meansurements and alarm files. CTR is locally performed in the BSS. The ‘shutting down’ value for the administrative state means that the current connection traces in the cell is finished. in contrast to the feature IMSI Tracing. ‘active’ means that at least one trace session is running but the BSC is able to start a new one.03. Moreover.5. In the other cases the recording is stopped on call termination (normal or abnormal). the ‘busy’ state does not mean that all the active tracing sessions are CTR tracesraces. Furthermore. CTR traces a definable number of calls within a specified cell.g.2000 Creating a Cell Traffic Recording (CTR) job: <The feature Cell Traffic Recording (CTR) is introduced in addition to the IMSI Trace (see command CREATE TRACE). The trace data recorded are temporarily stored in the BSC (see parameter CFS in command SET BSC PKGBSCC) from where they are compressed and automatically uploaded to the OMC. CTR in this case just follows up the signalling transactions in the target cell for a defined ‘trace handover persistence time’ which is fixed to 10 sec.0 Version 30. 113 / 142 Object path name. i. CREATE CTRSCHED: NAME=BSC:0/CTRCO:0/ ctrsched:0. overload).SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.. resource (cell) related. The purpose of CTR is to collect call trace data in such a way that they can be chronologically aligned to the existing cell specific event. In this case the CTR recording function is just stopped for a specific cell. Basically the contents of a CTR trace is exactly the same as the one for an IMSI trace.

Stop date.minute . Period during the week. format: range: default: default: ALL. TAC3 SBS . this parameter determines the maximum number of connections to be traced within the cell. day .2000 ALL. Eckardt Bertermann. this parameter defines the start date of the trace activities. The maximum number of IMSI traces is limited to 7. MESSAGE ALL Trace period type.03. this parameter defines the periods during which the CTR trace activities should be active within a week by its start time and the trace duration. this parameter defines the stop date of the trace activities. Note: The overall maximum number of traced connections (IMSI and CTR traces) is restriced to 16. this parameter determines whether the trace file shall contain only the signalling messages only (MESSAGE) or whether it shall contain the uplink and downlink measurement results/reports in addition (ALL). range: 1-16 START=1-1-1992. if MACONN is set to a bigger value than 9 while IMSI tracing is active.year day: 1-31 month: 1-12 year: 1992 – 2099 31-12-2099 TRACEPTYP=ALL. WEEKLY ALL PERWEEK=31-12-2099. Trace record type. IMSI tracing always has precedence over CTR. Fore every day of the week an appropriate period can be entered. This means that.month . ongoing CTR traces will be stopped if the maximum number of simultaneous traces is reached and new IMSI trace invocations are received from the MSC.duration. range: default: 114 / 142 Start date. this parameter defines whether the trace shall be always active between the start and stop date (ALL) or whether it shall be active only during the periods (WEEKLY) specified by the parameter PERWEEK. day . last field represents saturday hour: 0-23 minute: 0-59 duration: 0-1440 NO_CONFIG (for each field) TRACERECTYP=ALL.month . 0-149 MACONN=16. fisrt field represents sunday. range: default: Maximum number of connections. format: range: default: 7 fields with the structure hour . format: range: Version 30.year day: 1-31 month: 1-12 year: 1992 – 2099 1-1-1992 STOP=31-12-2099. range: Cell Identity.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.0 CID=0. this parameter determines the object instance number of the cell to be traced in the CTRSCHED object.

error detection threshold.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.0 Version 30. range: default: TRUE. unit: range: default: 115 / 142 interface logic. 1s 0-65534 2 Eckardt Bertermann. determines the interface logic of the alarm detection equipment (normally OPEN or CLOSED). identifies the alarm type of the external alarm. NAME=FIRE. Object path name. represents the error detection threshold in seconds. TAC3 SBS . FALSE TRUE THR=2. Environmental alarm name.03.2000 Defining the BSC environmental alarms: CREATE ENVA: NAME=BSC:0/enva:0. range: SMOKE INTR TX_EQ_MIN TX_EQ_MAJ TX_EQ_CRIT POW_MIN POW_MAJ POW_CRIT GEN_ALM_MIN GEN_ALM_MAJ DOOR_OPEN FIRE HEAT_EVENT HUMIDITY TEMPERATURE INT=TRUE.

2000 . TAC3 SBS Version 30.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.03.0 116 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann.

Handover and Power Control 2.1.1 Functional Diagram Handover Thresholds for Inter-cell Handover and Intracell Handover (level.0 2 Version 30.03.1 Handover Thresholds & Algorithms 2. quality and power budget) XX=UL : Uplink Handover Bit-Error-Rate (RXQual) Inter-cell handover due to quality (skip flag not evaluated) Intra-cell handover due to quality (if skip flag=FALSE) made by: Gunther Döhler Inter-cell handover due to quality (if skip flag=TRUE or if INTRACH=FALSE) L_RXQual_H HOLTHQUXX Inter-cell handover due to power budget Inter-cell handover due to level XX=DL : Downlink XX=UL : Uplink HOTXXINT HOLTHLVTXX L_RXLev_H Abbreviations: L_RXLev_IH RXLEV RXQUAL Level (RXLev) = receive level of serving cell = bit error rate of serving cell GSM Parameter Name DB parameter Name (SET HAND) Meaning L_RXLev_DL_H HOLTHLVDL lower threshold value for level handover downlink L_RXLev_UL_H HOLTHLVUL lower threshold value for level handover uplink L_RXLev_DL_IH HOTDLINT threshold value for intra BTS handover downlink L_RXLev_UL_IH HOTULINT threshold value for intra BTS handover uplink L_RXQual_DL_H HOLTHQUDL lower threshold value for quality handover downlink L_RXQual_UL_H HOLTHQUUL lower threshold value for quality handover uplink 117 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann. TAC3 SBS .SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.2000 Appendix .

2. RXLEV_XX < L_RXLEV_XX_H RXLEV_XX XX = DL or UL = received level average of the serving cell (the averaging is done according to the setting of HOAVELEV (SET HAND)) L_RXLEV_XX_H = HOLTHLVXX (SET HAND) = lower threshold value for level handover → The received level average of the serving cell is lower than the value set for HOLTHLVXX 2. Power Control disabled 2.e. YY_TXPWR = Min(YY_TXPWR_MAX.or BTS transmit power YY_TXPWR_MAX = maximum MS. value in dBm BTS_TXPWR_MAX is determined by the used type of PA and the parameter PWRRED (CREATE TRX) P = power capability of the mobile (in dBm) Min(YY_TXPWR_MAX.1. quality and power budget).SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.1 Inter-cell Handover (level) An Inter-cell-handover (level) is performed if all of the following conditions are fulfilled: 1.e.P) YY_TXPWR YY = MS or BTS = current MS. TAC3 SBS . RXQUAL_XX < L_RXQUAL_XX_H RXQUAL_XX XX = DL or UL = received quality (i. bit error rate) average of the serving cell is lower than the value set for HOLTHQUXX 3.0 2.2 Version 30.2000 Rules: Handover Thresholds for Inter-cell Handover and Intra-cell Handover (level.depending on whichever is lower) → The transmit power of MS and BTS is at the maximum (since in this case PWRC is disabled this is the case anyway) 118 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann.P) = YY_TXPWR_MAX if YY_TXPWR_MAX < P if YY_TXPWR_MAX > P Min(YY_TXPWR_MAX.03.1.P) = P (for the mobile the maximum allowed transmit power is determined by its power class or by the administered value for MSTXPMAX .or BTS transmit power where MS_TXPWR_MAX = MSTXPMAX (SET BTS PKGBTSB). bit error rate) average of the serving cell (the averaging is done according to the setting of HOAVQUAL (SET HAND)) L_RXQUAL_XX_H = HOLTHQUXX (SET HAND) = lower threshold value for quality handover → The received quality (i.

allowed transmit power of neighbour cell (n) P = power capability of the mobile (in dBm) Max(0.Pa) 119 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann.0 4.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.P < 0 → The actual receive level average of the neighbour cell must be higher than the sum of the minimum receive level set for the neighbour cell and the correction factor Max(0.P Max(0.03.Pa) = MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) .Pa) = 0 if MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) . Pa) where Pa = MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) . value in dBm = max. TAC3 SBS .P RXLEV_NCELL(n) = received level average of the neighbour cell (n) (the averaging is done according to the setting of HOAVPWRB (SET HAND)) RXLEVMIN(n) = RXLEVMIN (CREATE ADJC) = minimum receive level of the neighbour cell (n) MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) = MSTXPMAXCL (SET ADJC).2000 RXLEV_NCELL(n) > RXLEVMIN(n) + Max(0.P > 0 if MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) . Version 30.

TAC3 SBS .or BTS transmit power.2.or BTS transmit power. value in dBm YY_TXPWR_MAX = maximum MS.P) = P (for the mobile the maximum allowed transmit power is determined by its power class or by the administered value for MSTXPMAX .not administrable via DB commands!) is set to TRUE and an Inter-cell handover (quality) is performed (see D). value in dBm where MS_TXPWR_MAX = MSTXPMAX (SET BTS PKGBTSB).SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. value in dBm BTS_TXPWR_MAX is determined by the used type of PA and the parameter PWRRED (CREATE TRX) P = power capability of the mobile (in dBm) Min(YY_TXPWR_MAX. RXLEV_XX > L_RXLEV_XX_IH RXLEV_XX XX = DL or UL = received level average of the serving cell (the averaging is done according to the setting of HOAVELEV (SET HAND)) L_RXLEV_XX_IH = HOTXXINT (SET HAND) = threshold value for intra BTS handover → The received level average of the serving cell is higher than the value set for HOTXXINT 3. if the intra-cell handover is disabled (INTRACH=FALSE) the threshold HOTXXINT is not evaluated and the conditions which normally cause an intra-cell handover lead to an inter-cell handover. 120 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann. bit error rate) average of the serving cell (the averaging is done according to the setting of HOAVQUAL (SET HAND)) L_RXQUAL_XX_H = HOLTHQUXX (SET HAND) = lower threshold value for quality handover → The received quality (i. Moreover. RXQUAL_XX > L_RXQUAL_XX_H RXQUAL_XX XX = DL or UL = received quality (i. YY_TXPWR = Min(YY_TXPWR_MAX.1.P) YY_TXPWR YY = MS or BTS = current MS.e.e.depending on whichever is lower) → The transmit power of MS and BTS is at the maximum (since in this case PWRC is disabled this condition is fulfilled anyway) Important Note: If the Intra-cell handover (quality) triggered by the above mentioned conditions fails a system internal flag (so-called ‘skip-flag’ . bit error rate) average of the serving cell is higher than the value set for HOLTHQUXX 2.P) = YY_TXPWR_MAX if YY_TXPWR_MAX < P if YY_TXPWR_MAX > P Min(YY_TXPWR_MAX.03. For details on these types of intra-cell handover please refer to the diagrams ’Handover Parameter Relations’ and the associated parameter descriptions in the SET HAND command.0 Version 30.2 Intra-cell handover (quality) An Intra-cell handover (quality) is performed if all of the following conditions are fulfilled: 1. General Note: The intra-cell handover in concentric cells (inner-complete and complete-inner) and for extended cells (near-to-far and far-to-near) are not considered in this context.2000 2.

1. * RXLEV_XX < L_RXLEV_XX_IH RXLEV_XX XX = DL or UL = received level average of the serving cell (the averaging is done according to the setting of HOAVELEV (SET HAND)) L_RXLEV_XX_IH = HOTXXINT (SET HAND) = threshold value for intra BTS handover → The received level average of the serving cell is lower than the value set for HOTXXINT * Note: This condition is not relevant if intracell handover due to quality is disabled (INTRACH=FALSE). YY_TXPWR = Min(YY_TXPWR_MAX. value in dBm = max. TAC3 SBS .2.Pa) Eckardt Bertermann. bit error rate) average of the serving cell is higher than the value set for HOLTHQUXX 2. If this is the case then only the quality conditions are considered. bit error rate) average of the serving cell (the averaging is done according to the setting of HOAVQUAL (SET HAND)) L_RXQUAL_XX_H = HOLTHQUXX (SET HAND) = lower threshold value for quality handover → The received quality (i.P) YY_TXPWR YY = MS or BTS = current MS.0 Version 30.P RXLEV_NCELL(n) = received level average of the neighbour cell (n) (the averaging is done according to the setting of HOAVPWRB (SET HAND)) RXLEVMIN(n) = RXLEVMIN (CREATE ADJC) = minimum receive level of the neighbour cell (n) MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) = MSTXPMAXCL (SET ADJC). RXLEV_NCELL(n) > RXLEVMIN(n) + Max(0.P Max(0. Pa) where Pa = MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) . value in dBm where MS_TXPWR_MAX = MSTXPMAX (SET BTS PKGBTSB) BTS_TXPWR_MAX is determined by the used type of PA and the parameter PWRRED (CREATE TRX) P = power capability of the mobile (in dBm) Min(YY_TXPWR_MAX.Pa) = MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) .P > 0 if MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) .P) = YY_TXPWR_MAX if YY_TXPWR_MAX < P if YY_TXPWR_MAX > P Min(YY_TXPWR_MAX. 3.depending on whichever is lower) → The transmit power of MS and BTS is at the maximum (since in this case PWRC is disabled this condition is fulfilled anyway) 4. RXQUAL_XX > L_RXQUAL_XX_H RXQUAL_XX XX = DL or UL = received quality (i.2000 2.e. value in dBm YY_TXPWR_MAX = maximum MS.e.3 Inter-cell handover (quality) An Inter-cell handover (quality) is performed if all of the following conditions are fulfilled: 1.P < 0 The actual receive level average of the neighbour cell must be higher than the sum of minimum receive level set for the neighbour cell and the correction factor Max(0.or BTS transmit power.Pa) = 0 → 121 / 142 if MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) .P) = P (for the mobile the maximum allowed transmit power is determined by its power class or by the administered value for MSTXPMAX .03. allowed transmit power of neighbour cell (n) P = power capability of the mobile (in dBm) Max(0.or BTS transmit power.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.

allowed transmit power of neighbour cell (n) P = power capability of the mobile (in dBm) Max(0.4 Inter-cell handover (distance) An Inter-cell handover (quality) is performed if all of the following conditions are fulfilled: 1.Pa) 122 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann. distance between MS and BTS (for extended cells) → The actual distance between MS and BTS is bigger than the value set for HOTMSRM 2.P < 0 → The actual receive level average of the neighbour cell must be higher than the sum of minimum receive level set for the neighbour cell and the correction factor Max(0.03.2.Pa) = 0 if MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) .P Max(0.2000 Important Notes: In this case the status of the internal flag does not have any influence on the handover decision. value in dBm = max.1.P RXLEV_NCELL(n) = received level average of the neighbour cell (n) (the averaging is done according to the setting of HOAVPWRB (SET HAND)) RXLEVMIN(n) = RXLEVMIN (CREATE ADJC) = minimum receive level of the neighbour cell (n) MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) = MSTXPMAXCL (SET ADJC). RXLEV_NCELL(n) > RXLEVMIN(n) + Max(0.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. MS_BS_DIST > MS_RANGE_MAX MS_BS_DIST = actual distance between MS and BTS MS_RANGE_MAX = HOTMSRM (SET HAND) = maximum distance between MS and BTS (for standard cells) = HOTMSRME (SET HAND) = max. TAC3 SBS .Pa) = MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) . Pa) where Pa = MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) .P > 0 if MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) .0 Version 30. 2.

allowed transmit power of neighbour cell (n) P = power capability of the mobile (in dBm) Max(0.e.5 Inter-cell Handover (power budget) An Inter-cell handover (power budget) is performed if all of the following conditions are fulfilled: 1.2000 2.Pa) = MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) . bit error rate) average of the serving cell is lower than the value set for HOLTHQUXX 3.0 Version 30.Pa) = 0 if MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) .P > 0 if MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) . RXQUAL_XX < L_RXQUAL_XX_H RXQUAL_XX XX = DL or UL = received quality (i.Pa) 123 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann.P Max(0.e.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.2.P RXLEV_NCELL(n) = received level average of the neighbour cell (n) (the averaging is done according to the setting of HOAVPWRB (SET HAND)) RXLEVMIN(n) = RXLEVMIN (CREATE ADJC) = minimum receive level of the neighbour cell (n) MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) = MSTXPMAXCL (SET ADJC).1. RXLEV_XX > L_RXLEV_XX_H RXLEV_XX XX = DL or UL = received level average of the serving cell (the averaging is done according to the setting of HOAVELEV (SET HAND)) L_RXLEV_XX_H = HOLTHLVXX (SET HAND) = lower threshold value for level handover → The received level average of the serving cell is higher than the value set for HOLTHLVXX 2. TAC3 SBS .03. bit error rate) average of the serving cell (the averaging is done according to the setting of HOAVQUAL (SET HAND)) L_RXQUAL_XX_H = HOLTHQUXX (SET HAND) = lower threshold value for quality handover → The received quality (i.P < 0 → The actual receive level average of the neighbour cell must be higher than the sum of minimum receive level set for the neighbour cell and the correction factor Max(0. Pa) where Pa = MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) . value in dBm = max. RXLEV_NCELL(n) > RXLEVMIN(n) + Max(0.

Min (MS_TXPWR_MAX(n). vaule in dBm = max. Version 30.0 4.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.03.P) = P if if MS_TXPWR_MAX < P MS_TXPWR_MAX > P → The power budget of the neighbour cell must be higher than the handover margin set for the neighbour cell 124 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann.2000 PBGT(n) > HO_MARGIN(n) where PBGT(n) = RXLEV_NCELL(n) .(RXLEV_DL + PWR_C_D) + Min (MS_TXPWR_MAX.P) = MS_TXPWR_MAX Min(MS_TXPWR_MAX. value in dBm = max.BS_TXPWR = averaged difference between the maximum downlink RF power and the actual downlink due to Power Control Note: In this case PWR_C_D = 0 since Power Control is disabled. allowed transmit power of serving cell (n) MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) = MSTXPMAXCL (SET ADJC). MS_TXPWR_MAX = MSTXPMAX (SET BTS PKGBTSB). P) . TAC3 SBS . P) PBGT (n) = power budget of the neighbour cell (n) HO_MARGIN(n) = HOM (CREATE ADJC) = handover margin of the neighbour cell (n) RXLEV_NCELL(n) = received level average of the neighbour cell (n) (the averaging is done according to the setting of HOAVPWRB (SET HAND)) RXLEV_DL = received level average downlink of the serving cell PWR_C_D = BS_TXPWR_MAX . allowed transmit power of neighbour cell (n) P = power capability of the mobile (in dBm) Min(MS_TXPWR_MAX.

Thus. TAC3 SBS . When it exspires.n) = HO_MARGIN(n) + HO_STATIC_OFFSET(n) . if e. HOMSOFF and HOMDOFF have the same value the original power budget condition is reestablished.0 Version 30. 125 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann.HO_DYNAMIC_OFFSET(n) for t ≤ HOMDTIME for t ≥ HOMDTIME where HO_MARGIN(n) = HOM (CREATE ADJC) = handover margin of the neighbour cell (n) HO_STATIC_OFFSET(n) = HOMSOFF (CREATE ADJC) = handover static offset of the neighbour cell (n) HO_DYNAMIC_OFFSET(n) = HOMDOFF (CREATE ADJC) = handover dynamic offset of the neighbr.). HOMDTIME is started when the normal power budget condition is detected for the first time.HOMDOFF HOM t HOMDTIME start of timer* expiry of timer * the timer HOMDTIME is started for every neighbour cell when the normal power budget condition (PGBT(n)>HO_MARGIN) is fulfilled and is stopped again if the condition disappeares.2000 2.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.2.5.) is not PBGT(n) > HO_MARGIN(n) but PBGT(n) > HO_MARGIN_TIME(n) where HO_MARGIN_TIME(t. the value entered for HOMDOFF is substracted from the sum of HOM and HOMSOFF.1. For those neighbour cells for which speed sensitive handover is enabled (SET ADJC:MICROCELL=TRUE) the HOM value is increased by the value entered for HOMSOFF for the duration of HOMDTIME.03. This means: for speed sensitive handover the condition (4.1 Speed sensitive handover enabled Precondition: speed sensitive handover is enabled for the cell (SET HAND:DPBGTHO=TRUE.g.n) = HO_MARGIN(n) + HO_STATIC_OFFSET(n) HO_MARGIN_TIME(t. cell (n) HO_MARGIN_TIME(t) HOM + HOMSOFF HOMDOFF HOMSOFF HOM + HOMSOFF .

2000 2.0 Version 30.2 Power Control Thresholds 2.2.03.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.1 Functional Diagram: Power Control Thresholds: Power Increase / Power Decrease Bit-Error-Rate (RXQual) Power-Control made by: Gunther Döhler Power Increase L_RXQual_P LOWTQUAX Power Increase no Power Control Power Decrease U_RXQual_P UPTQUAX Power Decrease LOWTLEVX + 2 * PWRREDSS LOWTLEVX L_RXLev_P Abbreviations: L_RXLev_P + 2*Pow-Red-StepSize RXLEV RXQUAL X=D : Downlink X=U : Uplink UPTLEVX U_RXLev_P Level (RXLev) = receive level of serving cell = bit error rate of serving cell GSM Parameter Name DB parameter Name (SET PWRC) Meaning L_RXLev_DL_P LOWTLEVD power control lower level threshold downlink L_RXLev_UL_P LOWTLEVU power control lower level threshold downlink U_RXLev_DL_P UPTLEVD power control upper level threshold downlink U_RXLev_UL_P UPTLEVU power control upper level threshold uplink L_RXLev_XX_P + 2∗ POW_RED_STEP_ SIZE LOWTLEVX + 2∗PWRREDSS power control lower threshold plus 2 ∗ power reduction step size L_RXQual_DL_P LOWTQUAD power control lower quality threshold downlink L_RXQual_UL_P LOWTQUAU power control lower quality threshold uplink U_RXQual_DL_P UPTQUAD power control upper quality threshold downlink U_RXQual_UL_P UPTQUAU power control upper quality threshold uplink 126 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann. TAC3 SBS .

1 Power Increase The TRX Power is increased if one of the following conditions is fulfilled: 1. Handover disabled 2.2000 Rules: Power Control Thresholds: Power Increase / Power Decrease.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. RXLEV_XX < L_RXLEV_XX_P XX = DL or UL RXLEV_XX = received level average of the serving cell (the averaging is done according to the setting of PAVRLEV (SET PWRC)) L_RXLEV_XX_P = LOWTLEVX (SET PWRC) = power control lower level threshold → The received level average of the serving cell is lower than the value set for LOWTLEVX 2. TAC3 SBS .2.2.0 2.2. bit error rate) average of the serving cell (the averaging is done according to the setting of PAVRQUAL (SET PWRC)) L_RXQUAL_XX_P = LOWTQUAX (SET PWRC) = power control lower quality threshold → The received quality average of the serving cell is higher than the value set for LOWTQUAX 127 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann.03. RXQUAL_XX > L_RXQUAL_XX_P RXQUAL_XX XX = DL or UL = received quality (i.2 Version 30.e.

e. RXQUAL_XX < U_RXQUAL_XX_P XX = DL or UL = received quality (i. bit error rate) average of the serving cell (the averaging is done according to the setting of PAVRQUAL (SET PWRC)) L_RXQUAL_XX_P = LOWTQUAX (SET PWRC) = power control lower quality threshold → The received quality average of the serving cell is lower than the value set for LOWTQUAX 128 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann. RXLEV_XX > U_RXLEV_XX_P XX = DL or UL RXLEV_XX = received level average of the serving cell (the averaging is done according to the setting of PAVRLEV (SET PWRC)) U_RXLEV_XX_P = UPTLEVX (SET PWRC) = power control upper level threshold → The received level average of the serving cell is higher than the value set for UPTLEVX 2b.2 Power Decrease 1) The TRX Power is decreased if both of the following conditions are fulfilled: 1a. RXLEV_XX > L_RXLev_P + 2∗ POW_RED_STEP_SIZE XX = DL or UL = received level average of the serving cell (the averaging is done according to the setting of PAVRLEV (SET PWRC)) RXLEV_XX L_RXLEV_XX_P = LOWTLEVX (SET PWRC) = power control lower level threshold POW_RED_STEP_SIZE = PWRREDSS (SET PWRC) = power reduction step size → The received level average of the serving cell is higher than the sum of the value set for LOWTLEVX and 2 times the value set for PWRREDSS 1b. bit error rate) average of the serving cell (the averaging is done according to the setting of PAVRQUAL (SET PWRC)) RXQUAL_XX U_RXQUAL_XX_P = UPTQUAX (SET PWRC) = power control upper quality threshold → The received quality average of the serving cell is lower than the value set for UPTQUAX or 2) The TRX Power is decreased if both of the following conditions are fulfilled: 2a.2000 2.2.2.0 Version 30.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.e.03. RXQUAL_XX RXQUAL_XX < L_RXQUAL_XX_P XX = DL or UL = received quality (i. TAC3 SBS .

3.0 Version 30. Power Increase and Power Decrease Bit-Error Rate(RxQual) L_RXQual_H Inter-cell handover due to quality (skip flag not evaluated) Power-Control + Handover Intra-cell handover due to quality (if skip flag=FALSE) made by: Gunther Döhler Inter-cell handover due to quality (if skip flag=TRUE or if INTRACH=FALSE) HOLTHQUXX Power Increase L_RXQual_P LOWTQUAX Inter-cell handover due to level Inter-cell handover due to power budget Power Decrease U_RXQual_P UPTQUAX X=D : Downlink X=U : Uplink HOTXXINT L_RXLev_IH HOLTHLVXX L_RXLev_H Abbreviations: XX=DL: Downlink XX=UL: Uplink L_RXLev_P + 2*Pow-Red-Step-Size LOWTLEVX L_RXLev_P RXLEV RXQUAL LOWTLEVX + 2 * PWRREDSS UPTLEVX U_RXLev_P Level (RXLev) = receive level of serving cell = bit error rate of serving cell GSM Parameter Name DB parameter Name (SET HAND) Meaning L_RXLev_DL_H HOLTHLVDL lower threshold value for level handover downlink L_RXLev_UL_H HOLTHLVUL lower threshold value for level handover uplink L_RXLev_DL_IH HOTDLINT threshold value for intra BTS handover downlink L_RXLev_UL_IH HOTULINT threshold value for intra BTS handover uplink L_RXQual_DL_H HOLTHQUDL lower threshold value for quality handover downlink L_RXQual_UL_H HOLTHQUUL lower threshold value for quality handover uplink 129 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann.3 Handover in Connection with Power Control 2.03. TAC3 SBS .1 Functional Diagram: Inter-cell Handover and Intra-cell Handover.2000 2.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.

The following rules should be followed: 1. UPTQUAX < LOWTQUAX < HOLTHQUXX (XX = UL or DL.0 Version 30. U_RXQual_XX_P < L_RXQual_XX_P < L_RXQual_XX_H (XX = UL or DL) Translated to the DB parameter names the rules are: 1. X = U or D) 130 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann. HOLTHLVXX < LOWTLEVX < LOWTLEVX+2∗PWRREDSS < UPTLEVX 2. L_RXLev_XX_H < L_RXLev_XX_P < L_RXLev_XX_P+2∗ POW_RED_STEP_SIZE < U_RXLev_XX_P 2. because the algorithms are designed for such a threshold configuration.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.03.2000 General Parameter Name DB parameter Name (SET PWRC) Meaning L_RXLev_DL_P LOWTLEVD power control lower level threshold downlink L_RXLev_UL_P LOWTLEVU power control lower level threshold downlink U_RXLev_DL_P UPTLEVD power control upper level threshold downlink U_RXLev_UL_P UPTLEVU power control upper level threshold uplink L_RXLev_XX_P + 2∗ POW_RED_STEP_ SIZE LOWTLEVX + 2∗PWRREDSS power control lower threshold plus 2 ∗ power reduction step size L_RXQual_DL_P LOWTQUAD power control lower quality threshold downlink L_RXQual_UL_P LOWTQUAU power control lower quality threshold uplink U_RXQual_DL_P UPTQUAD power control upper quality threshold downlink U_RXQual_UL_P UPTQUAU power control upper quality threshold uplink 2.3.2 Rules The diagram on the previous page shows the interaction between Handover and Power Control in the SBS. It has to be noted that the thresholds for Handover and Power Control should be set in accordance with the diagram. TAC3 SBS .

1 Cell ranking for power budget handovers (non-imperative handover) For power budget handovers the cell ranking is done in the following way: A) A neighbour cell appears in the target cell list of the HANDOVER CONDITION INDICATION if 1.4 Hierarchical Cell Structure 2.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.4. value in dBm = max. PBGT(n) > HO_MARGIN(n) where PBGT(n) = RXLEV_NCELL(n) . allowed transmit power of neighbour cell (n) P = power capability of the mobile (in dBm) Max(0. value in dBm = max. PRIO_NCELL (n) ≤ PRIO_SCELL PRIO_NCELL PRIO_SCELL 131 / 142 = PLNC (SET ADJC) = priority layer assigned to the neighbour cell = PPLNC (SET ADJC) = penalized priority layer assigned to the neighbour cell (relevant only if speed sensitive handover is enabled) = PL (SET HAND) = priority layer assigned to the serving cell Eckardt Bertermann.Pa) = MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) .P if MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) . allowed transmit power of serving cell (n) MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) = MSTXPMAXCL (SET ADJC). value in dBm = max.03.P) = P if MS_TXPWR_MAX > P PBGT (n) HO_MARGIN(n) RXLEV_NCELL(n) RXLEV_DL PWR_C_D and 3.(RXLEV_DL + PWR_C_D) + Min(MS_TXPWR_MAX.Pa) RXLEV_NCELL(n) = received level average of the neighbour cell (n) RXLEVMIN(n) = RXLEVMIN (CREATE ADJC) = minimum receive level of the neighbour cell (n) MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) = MSTXPMAXCL (SET ADJC).Pa) = 0 and 2. MS_TXPWR_MAX = MSTXPMAX (SET BTS PKGBTSB). TAC3 SBS .BS_TXPWR = averaged difference between the maximum downlink RF power and the actual downlink due to power budget.P > 0 if MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) .P < 0 Max(0.P) = power budget of the neighbour cell (n) = HOM (CREATE ADJC) = handover margin of the neighbour cell (n) = received level average of the neighbour cell (n) = received level average downlink of the serving cell = BS_TXPWR_MAX .2000 2.0 Version 30. allowed transmit power of neighbour cell (n) P = power capability of the mobile (in dBm) Min(MS_TXPWR_MAX.Min(MS_TXPWR_MAX(n).P) = MS_TXPWR_MAX if MS_TXPWR_MAX < P Min(MS_TXPWR_MAX. RXLEV_NCELL(n) > RXLEVMIN(n) + Max(0. P) .

). For those neighbour cells for which speed sensitive handover is enabled (SET ADJC:MICROCELL=TRUE) the power budget handover decision algorithm considers a) the HO_MARGIN_TIME instead of HO_MARGIN.1. Cells with the same priority level are ordered according to the value of PBGT(n) .1.. . neighbour cell 4. 2.0 Version 30. For details please refer to the parameter description for the parameters PLNC. For details please refer to section 2.5..5. priority 0 15 Inter-cell HCI: target cell list 1.03.1. . neighbour cell .2.. neighbour cell 5.4. neighbour cell 2.1 (Power Budget Handover / Speed sensitive handover). TAC3 SBS . b) the ‘penalty priority layer of neighbour cell’ (PPLNC) instead of ‘priority layer of neighbour cell’ (PLNC) as long as the handover margin delay timer (HOMDTIME) runs..HO_MARGIN(n).1 (Power Budget Handover / Speed sensitive handover).1 Speed sensitive handover enabled Precondition: speed sensitive handover is enabled for the cell (SET HAND:DPBGTHO=TRUE. PPLNC and HOMDTIME in the command SET ADJC and to section 2.2. 132 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann.2000 B) The cells in the target cell list of the HANDOVER CONDITION INDICATION message are ordered according to their priority (not according to their level). neighbour cell 3.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.

Pa) = MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) .Pa) RXLEV_NCELL(n) = received level average of the neighbour cell (n) RXLEVMIN(n) = RXLEVMIN (CREATE ADJC) = minimum receive level of the neighbour cell (n) MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) = MSTXPMAXCL (SET ADJC).P if MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) .2 Version 30. value in dBm = forced handover receive level minimum offset of adjacent cell (n) Max(0.1 Ranking method 0 If the cell ranking method RANK 0 (SET HAND:HIERF=RANK0. 133 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann. allowed transmit power of neighbour cell (n) P = power capability of the mobile (in dBm) FHO_RXLEV_MIN_OFFSET(n) = FHORLMO (SET ADJC).0 2.P < 0 Max(0.2.2000 Cell ranking for imperative handovers (due to level. value in dBm = max.P < 0 Max(0.) is in effect for imperative handovers (i.4.Pa) = 0 continuation see next page.03.P > 0 if MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) . allowed transmit power of neighbour cell (n) P = power capability of the mobile (in dBm) Max(0.Pa) = MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) .4. value in dBm = max. quality and distance) and forced handover (directed retry) 2. TAC3 SBS .Pa) = 0 for forced handover (directed retry) RXLEV_NCELL(n) > RXLEVMIN(n) + Max(0.P > 0 if MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) ..e.P if MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) . handovers due to level.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.Pa) + FHO_RXLEV_MIN_OFFSET(n) RXLEV_NCELL(n) = received level average of the neighbour cell (n) RXLEVMIN(n) = RXLEVMIN (CREATE ADJC) = minimum receive level of the neighbour cell (n) MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) = MSTXPMAXCL (SET ADJC).. quality or distance) the cell ranking is done in the following way: A) A neighbour cell appears in the target cell list of the HANDOVER CONDITION INDICATION if the following condidtions are fulfilled: for imperative handovers RXLEV_NCELL(n) > RXLEVMIN(n) + Max(0.

neighbour cell 4. value in dBm = max.P) = MS_TXPWR_MAX if MS_TXPWR_MAX < P Min(MS_TXPWR_MAX. The upper sublist consists of all cells with PBGT(n) . neighbour cell 5. allowed transmit power of serving cell (n) MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) = MSTXPMAXCL (SET ADJC).HO_MARGIN ≤ 0 15 134 / 142 Inter-cell HCI: target cell list 1.P) = P if MS_TXPWR_MAX > P PBGT (n) HO_MARGIN(n) RXLEV_NCELL(n) RXLEV_DL PWR_C_D 3.. Eckardt Bertermann....HO_MARGIN(n) ≤ 0 where PBGT(n) = RXLEV_NCELL(n) .HO_MARGIN(n).. ..(RXLEV_DL + PWR_C_D) + Min(MS_TXPWR_MAX. . Cells with the same priority level are ordered according to the value of PBGT(n) .. neighbour cell . allowed transmit power of neighbour cell (n) P = power capability of the mobile (in dBm) Min(MS_TXPWR_MAX.P) = power budget of the neighbour cell (n) = HOM (CREATE ADJC) = handover margin of the neighbour cell (n) = received level average of the neighbour cell (n) = received level average downlink of the serving cell = BS_TXPWR_MAX . neighbour cell 3.03.2000 B) The cells in the target cell list HANDOVER CONDITION INDICATION are subdivided into two sublists: 1. priority 0 upper sublist: PGBT .. TAC3 SBS . MS_TXPWR_MAX = MSTXPMAX (SET BTS PKGBTSB). Within each sublist the cells in the target cell list HANDOVER CONDITION INDICATION are ordered according to their priority. P) .Min(MS_TXPWR_MAX(n).SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.BS_TXPWR = averaged difference between the maximum downlink RF power and the actual downlink due to power budget... . value in dBm = max.HO_MARGIN(n) > 0 2. The lower sublist consists of all cells with PBGT(n) .0 Version 30. neighbour cell 2.HO_MARGIN > 0 15 0 lower sublist: PGBT . .

P if MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) . handovers due to level.P if MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) .P > 0 if MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) . allowed transmit power of neighbour cell (n) P = power capability of the mobile (in dBm) FHO_RXLEV_MIN_OFFSET(n) = FHORLMO (SET ADJC).Pa) RXLEV_NCELL(n) = received level average of the neighbour cell (n) RXLEVMIN(n) = RXLEVMIN (CREATE ADJC) = minimum receive level of the neighbour cell (n) MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) = MSTXPMAXCL (SET ADJC).P > 0 if MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) .Pa) + FHO_RXLEV_MIN_OFFSET(n) RXLEV_NCELL(n) = received level average of the neighbour cell (n) RXLEVMIN(n) = RXLEVMIN (CREATE ADJC) = minimum receive level of the neighbour cell (n) MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) = MSTXPMAXCL (SET ADJC).P < 0 Max(0.4.2.e.Pa) = MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) .03.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.Pa) = 0 for forced handover (directed retry) RXLEV_NCELL(n) > RXLEVMIN(n) + Max(0. value in dBm = forced handover receive level minimum offset of adjacent cell (n) Max(0.Pa) = MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) . 135 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann.) is in effect for imperative handovers (i. value in dBm = max. TAC3 SBS .2 Ranking method 1 If the cell ranking method RANK 1 (SET HAND:HIERF=RANK1.2000 2.P < 0 Max(0...Pa) = 0 continuation see next page.0 Version 30. value in dBm = max. allowed transmit power of neighbour cell (n) P = power capability of the mobile (in dBm) Max(0. quality or distance) the cell ranking is done in the following way: A) A neighbour cell appears in the target cell list of the HANDOVER CONDITION INDICATION if the following condidtions are fulfilled: for imperative handovers RXLEV_NCELL(n) > RXLEVMIN(n) + Max(0.

. value in dBm = max. neighbour cell 2.Pa) + FHR_OFF(n) 2.SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. neighbour cell 5. Within each sublist the cells in the target cell list HANDOVER CONDITION INDICATION are ordered according to their priority..HO_MARGIN(n). Cells with the same priority level are ordered according to the value of PBGT(n) . . neighbour cell 4.. neighbour cell . The upper sublist consists of all cells with RXLEV_NCELL(n) > RXLEVMIN(n) + Max(0.0 Version 30. The lower sublist consists of all cells with RXLEV_NCELL(n) ≤ RXLEVMIN(n) + Max(0.Pa) + FHR_OFF(n) = received level average of the neighbour cell (n) = RXLEVMIN (CREATE ADJC) = minimum receive level of the neighbour cell (n) = MSTXPMAXCL (SET ADJC).. allowed transmit power of neighbour cell (n) P = power capability of the mobile (in dBm) Max(0.Pa) + FHR_OFF(n) lower sublist: RXLEV_NCELL(n) ≤ RXLEVMIN(n) + Max(0. neighbour cell 3.Pa) + FHR_OFF(n) 0 15 0 15 136 / 142 Inter-cell HCI: target cell list 1..Pa) = MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) .P > 0 Max(0. Eckardt Bertermann.Pa) = 0 if MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) ....P if MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) .. . priority upper sublist: RXLEV_NCELL(n) > RXLEVMIN(n) + Max(0. TAC3 SBS .P < 0 FHR_OFF(n)= LEVONC (SET ADJC) = level offset of neighbour cell for ranking method 1 RXLEV_NCELL(n) RXLEVMIN(n) MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) 3..03. ..2000 B) The cells in the target cell list HANDOVER CONDITION INDICATION are subdivided into two sublists: 1.

. 107 AISAT ....... 24 ALRMSEVDISK.. 114 CLOCK............................................. 24 ALRMSEVLPDLR....... 107 CODE (PCMA) ....................2000 Alphabetical Command and Parameter Index Note: The ’NAME’ parameter (contained in every object) is not included in the index................................. 24 ALRMSEVME2M.................... 107 BCCHFREQ (ADJC) ........ 110 CBQ .......................... 65 CELLBARR ................. 11 BSCT4 ............................... 13 BSCT13 ........................ 24 ALRMSEVPCMS.................................................... 17 BTSR .......................................................... 29 BAF (PCMS) .............................................................................................. 24 ALRMSEVPCMB....................................... 63 CCELL ... 32 CREATE CBCL.......................................... 25 ALRMSEVLPDLM ........................................................................................................................... 98 CODE (PCMB) ....................................................................... 35 BTSSUPP145 ........................................................ 79 CELLGLID (PKGBTSB)................................................................ 24 ALRMSEVPPCC ........................ 35 BSMONTH ............................................03........................................................................................ 94 BMONTH ................................................................................. 35 BTSOVLH ......................................................................................................... 26 AMONTH ............................. TAC3 SBS .......................... 43 C CALL......................... 23 B BAF (PCMA) ................................................................................. 110 BTSHSCSD............................ 12 BSCT8 ................................................................................................ 31 ABISCH (LPDLR) ...... 24 ALRMSEVLPDLS.................................................... 93 BTSMN ...... 25 ALRMSEVLICDS......................................... 24 ALRMSEVTRX............................................................................................................... 26 ALRMSEVTDPC ................................ 25 ALRMSEVLICD...........................................................................................................0 3 Version 30.................... 27 ALARMT3 . 98 BER (PCMB).............. 10 CHTYPE .................. 27 ALARMT1 ................................................................................................................................................................... 13 BSCT11 ......................................................... 26 ALRMSEVSYNE ................. 14 BSCT18 ................................ 25 ALRMSEVIXLT .................................................................................................................................................................................. 25 ALRMSEVNTW...................................................... 14 BSCT3 ....... 110 Eckardt Bertermann.............................................................. 98 CRC (PCMB).................. 25 ALRMSEVDK40 ............................................................................................................ 46 ASMONTH ...... 25 ALRMSEVMPCC.......... 17 BSCT1 . 55 BSCOVLH................. 35 CREATE BTSM ....... 24 ALRMSEVBTSM ...................................................................... 94 CONCELL ............................................................................... 25 ALRMSEVMEMT ........................................................................... 52 CREATE ADJC........ 90 CICFM .................................. 15 BSIC (ADJC) .................................................................................................................................... 40 CBCLTYPE ...... 24 ALRMSEVX25A .......... 52 CELLGLID (ADJC) .............. 23 ALACOUNT ................................................................................................................................... 14 BSCT17 ........................... 79 CREATE BTS PKGBTSB ........ 14 BSCT19 . 19 ASCISER ....... 96 ALRMSEVBTS .... 26 ALRMSEVX25D ........................................................................ 43 CONGTH ...................................................................................... 25 ALRMSEVPPLD................. 87..................................................................... 35 CELLRESH ................................................................................................................................................................. 19 ASUBCH ............................SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11 BSCT10 .. 26 ALRMSEVSYNC ...... 79 BSIC (PKGBTSB) ........... 39 CFS............................ 29 CODE (PCMS) ..... 88.................................... 11 BSCT7 ........................................................................................................................................ 101 BSSNAME ...... A ABISCH (LPDLM)..................... 98 BAF (PCMB) ... 25 ALRMSEVEPWR ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 94 CREALL ................................... 55 BSSAPSSN.......................................................................................................... 29 137 / 142 BER (PCMS) ................................................. 23 ASUBISAT ................................................................................................................................ 27 ALARMT2 ............................................................................................ 27 ALLCRIT .............. 19 CID...................................................... 39 BER (PCMA)....... 24 ALRMSEVPCMA..................................... 94 BAUDRATE ................ 24 ALRMSEVCBCL....................................... 12 BSCTQHO ........................................................................................................................ 25 ALRMSEVPWRD ..................... 43 BTSISHOP....................................... 14 BSCT20 ................................................................................ 80 BCCHFREQ (PKGBTSB) ....................................................................................... 95 ASUBENCAP .............. 29 CRC (PCMS).............. 36 CELLTYPE...... 42 CCDIST............................................................................................................................................................ 25 ALRMSEVOMAL.............................................................. 103 CRC (PCMA)........... 83 ACHAN ................. 26 ALRMSEVTRAU ...................................

............................ 23 EPWCRLFW ..... 20 HSN .................................................................................................................... 65 HOLTHLVDL ........................................................ 63 HOAVDIST......... 27 CREATE LICDS.................................... 109 FHORLMO ................................................................................................................................................................ 50 ENCALSUP.................................................................................... 93 HORXLVDLI ................................................................................. 58 INTRACH ........... 31 CREATE LPDLR ............................................................ 60 HOAVELEV................ 22 ENFORCHO ...................................................................... 81 FHSYID........................... 111 H HCICN........... 61 HOLTHQUUL ................................................................ 57 EPREHSCSD............ 20 EPRE ..................................................................... 86 I IERCHOSDCCH. 47 INTERCH ..................................................................................................... 42 CRESPARI. 81 HOMRGTA...................................................................................................... 112 CREATE TRAU .................................................................................................................. 64 HOSYNC...................................................... 71 ESDCCHHO................................................................................. TAC3 SBS ............................................. 33 EMT2 ............................................... 96 EXTCHO ... 86 CREATE LICD .................................................................................................. 90 CREATE CTRSCHED.... 89............................................................................................................... 107 CREATE X25D ................................. 62 DTEDCE ..................................................................... 73 EC............ 98 CREATE PCMB............ 58 IRACHOSDCCH.......... 96 CREATE TRX .................... 53 EEXCDIST ......................................... 90 FLOWCTH ............................................ 56 ERRACT .............................................. 98 HIERC................................................... 28 CREATE SS7L ..... 62 HOM ................................ 80 HOMSTAM............................................................... 62 HIERF ........................................................................................... 89............ 18 ENHSCSD .... 107 CRESOFF............................. 91 F FACCHQ......................... 103 FRTERM ............................ 88............SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.. 29 CREATE PCMS ................................................. 32 EXPSWV (TRAU)........................................................................................ 64 HORXLVDLO .............. 76 138 / 142 Version 30..... 16 ERRCORMTD............................. 107 DTXDLFR ............. 83 CREATE LPDLS................................................................................ 41 D DEFPOOLTYP..................................................................... 111 CREATE TRACE ............................................................................................................................................... 67 EMSPWRC .............................................. 95 CREATE NUC................................................... 87 CREATE CHAN (SDCCH)..........................................03............... 22 HOTDLINT ...... 81 HOMDTIME ............................. 65 INT ................... 115 CREATE EPWR.................................................................. 61 HOLTHLVUL ....................................... 55 EBSPWCR...................... 84 CREATE X25A........................ 33 ENANCD..................................................... 60 HOCCDIST ............................. 61 HOLTHQUDL ............ 65 HOTULINT .............................................................................................. 9 ININHO ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 99 DIRTCHASS ........................................................................................ 19 EXCDIST .................................................................................................................................................................... 53 DTXUL ............................................................................................................................... 106 CREATE SYNC ................................................................................................................................ 66 HOMSOFF .................................................. 26 CREATE FHSY............................................................................................................. 88 CREATE CHAN (TCH)... 101 CREATE PCMA.......... 113 CREATE ENVA....... 61 HOTMSRM .................... 47 INTCLASS ......................................................................... 59 DISTRICT ............ 39 FCTRL ................................... 73 EMT1 .................................... 94 CREATE PPLD............................................. 53 DTXDLHR ............................................... 68 Eckardt Bertermann....................................................... 68 IMSIATDT ................. 16 ENFOIAHO ................................. 77 EBSPWRC...... 115 INTAVEPR .................................................................. 103 ERUDGR ............................................................................................... 61 HRSPEECH ............................................................................................. 87............................................... 62 HOTMSRME .................... 26 CREATE LPDLM ................................... 80 HOMDOFF................................................ 111 CREATE OMAL ............................................................................. 60 HOAVQUAL ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 19 EISDCCHHO..... 110 DPBGTHO ................................................................................2000 EQ .......................... 66 HOPMODE ................................................................................................... 55 DISTHO ............................................................... 93 EFRSUPP ................................. 55 HOPP........ 92 EXTMODE ..... 21 ENPOOL... 54 IMSIFSIZ................................................................................................. 53 E EARCLM .......... 93 EXPSWV (BTSM) ....... 110 CREATE OPC PKGOPCP .............................................................. 18 ELIMITCH ........................................................................ 60 HOAVPWRB ..................0 CREATE CHAN (BCCH)............

................... 29 PCML (PCMS) . 96 PCMSOBJ...... 104 M3T1M................. 51 NCDP2.................................................... 95 LOWTLEVD ...................... 104 M3T2M.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 34 PCML (PCMB) ........................................................................................................................................................ 32 OPC ... 102 M2T5....................... 109 L3WIN.................................................... 46 NOCHFBLK......................................... 9 MICROCELL ................. 23 MAFIRACHO ........................................ 103 M3T12....................................................................................... 86 139 / 142 Version 30.. 110 LINKTYPE (OMAL) ................. 16 MSTXPMAX ....................... 98 NUA (PCMB)......................... 36 PLNC ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... TAC3 SBS .... 94 NY1................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 102 M2T6........................SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5..................................03... 74 LOWTLEVU ........... 26 LINKTYPE (CBCL) ................................................. 59 NETWTYPE................................................................................................................. 30 L2PV ................................ 111 PCMT........................................................................... 17 OVLSTTHR.... 110 LNKA .................... 102 M2T4E ................................................................................................................................................................. 114 MADGRLV ...................................... 102 M3T1........................................................ 114 PL . 104 MACONN ..................................................... 102 M2T3............................. 66 NRPGRANT ....................................... 115 NBLKACGR ........ 51 NCELL ................................................................................................... 9 MEDAFUST ........................................................ 104 M3T14................................. 34 PCMCON1 .............................................................................................. 36 MSTXPMAXCL............ 9 MAXFAILHO ................................................................................................... 62 PLMNP............................................................................................................. 59 LOWBER (PCMA)................................................................................................................................................. 75 LOWTQUAU ................ 103 M3T2............................................................................ 104 M3T3..................................... 104 M3T17........... 87................................................................................ 101 PERWEEK.................................... 66 MAXNCELL.............................................................................. 108 LCN2WC.................................................. 19 PCONINT......................................... 16 NFRAMEPG....................................................... 76 LPDLMSAT ................ 16 MAXRETR ........................... 66 NOCHBLKN ......................................................... 100 PPLNC ............... 106 LOTERCH...................................... 46 NOFREPHO........................................................................................ 109 L3PV ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 103 N2 ............................................................ 59 PCCCHLDI......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 102 M2T4N ............. 108 L3PS ...... 51 NSLOTST ........................................................ 17 P PAVRLEV ........ 67 MASCLOGFS ....................................................... 108 LEVONC ....................................... 30 LOWBER (PCMS)............. 103 NALLWACC ...... 39 PCMCON0 ..... 82 POOLTYP ........... 94 M M2T1....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 76 PENTIME .................. 29 NUA (PCMS).. 74 PBGTHO................................... 89.......................................... 98 PCMTYPE.............................................................................. 102 M2T2........................................................... 94 PCMSN ...................................................................................... 104 M3T19......... 108 L2WIN.............................................................................................. 46 N N1 .................... 82 LICDTYP (LICD) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 58 LOTRACH............................................................................................ 20 MSCVER................................................................................................. 42 NOBAKHO .............. 29 LREDUNEQ (PCMS)..................................................................................... 82 Eckardt Bertermann............................... 44 NTWCARD...................................................................................................................................................... 52 NAME (ENVA)................................................ 27 LICDTYP (LICDS) ........... 81 MOBALLOC ............................................... 19 NTWIND .................. 104 M3T5.........................................2000 MOEC ...... 101 NUA (PCMA)...................................... 18 MSCPOOL ........................... 31 LREDUNEQ (PCMB)....... 103 M3T22OR20.................................................... 23 MAIO ........................... 90 MAIRACHO............................................... 75 LOWTQUAD ............................... 44 MEDAFUPE ......... 74 PCRLFTH .......................................0 L L1CTRLTS1 ... 74 PAVRQUAL.. 45 NCDP1.......... 80 MTXPMAXCH ............................................................................................................................... 42 PERTFLAG .. 102 M2T7..................................... 44 O OMLAPDRT .................................... 85 MSCOVLH .................................................. 98 LOWBER (PCMB).......................... 45 NMBULAC........................................... 101 OVLENTHR........... 104 M3T13...................................... 104 M3T4....................

.............................................................................................................................................................................. 9 SET BSC PKGBSCS ......... 108 T22............................................. 32 140 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann........................ 90 TSLA.... 109 T26.. 108 T200................................................ 51 TOTERM................................................................. 96 TSYNCDL ................................................ 102 SET OPC PKGMTL3 ......................... 71 SET OPC PKGMTL2 ................................................. 54 T4 ..................................................................... 88............................................................................................................................................... 84 RAVEW .................................... 105 TRXAREA .................................................... 105 SET PWRC ................................... 71 TINOIERCHO.............................. 67 TINT............................ 106 SMSCBUSE . 106 TNOCH ................... 38 RXLEVHO .......................................... 31 TEI (LPDLS)................................................ 73 Q S SALUNAME (BTSM) ................ 103 SET BSC PKGBSCB............... 51 TSYNCR ............... 54 PWRRED............... 108 SHLAPDIT .. 82 TINHFAIHO..... 85 TRXFREQ ................................................................................................... 115 THROUGH................................................................................................... 11 SET BSCE PKGBSCES ... 72 RHOLTQUL ....... 110 REMAL (PCMA) ................. 51 PWRCONF ................................................................................................................................................... 109 T28................................................ 49 T3111........... 100 SET X25A................................... 108 SET X25D..................................... 112 REGION..... 100 TIAR. 47 SET BTS PKGBTSO ................................................................................................................................................................. 71 RDGRDL............................................................................................... 109 T3101................. 105 THORQST ......................................... 72 RDLNKTBS........................................... 114 STOP .................................... 84 TSBS ......................... 72 RDGRUL............................................... 95 TEMPOFF.............................................................................................................................................................................. 60 THR ............................ 109 RACHBT ...................... 48 T21................................................ TAC3 SBS ...0 Version 30..................................................................................................................................................... 92 SET HAND PKGHANDB.................... 82 TINHBAKHO .............................................. 16 T3212................................................................................................................................... 59 T1 ................................................................................... 108 T20. 109 TRACEPTYP....................................... 82 TINHRDGR ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 39 TCONN ......................................................... 23 SPENLAW ..................................................................... 52...................... 58.................................................................. 101 START .................................................................................................................... 19 SS7MTPTYP.......................................................................... 48 T3109.......................................................................... 108 TCCCHLDI .................. 105 TIMERFHO ...... 48 T3105.............................................. 105 TEI (LPDLM) ......................................... 101 SPEED145 ....................... 111 TRACE...... 103 SET OPC PKGSCCP............................................................................................................................................. 49 TSYNC (TRAU)................................................................. 38 RECCRI ............................................................... 38 RACHLAS . 58 SET HAND PKGHANDD..........SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5.......................................................... 46 PWROUT....................2000 QL............. 92 SPC ........................................................................................................................................................................ 72 RXLEVAMI ................................................................................ 56 SLC............................................................ 109 R23 ............................. 48 SET HAND...................................... 89.......... 42 TERTCH ..................... 49 T3122............................... 16 SET BSC PKGBSCC................................................................03. 84 RADIOMR ............................................................................................................... 39 R T R20 ...................................... 114 SYSID ....................................... 79 RXQUALHO ...................... 96 SANTIME....................................................................................... 84 PWRREDSS ................................ 108 RFRSINDP............................................................................................................... 73 PWROFS............................................................................ 47 RHOLTQDL .................................................................................................. 73 SET TSLA .. 33 SALUNAME (TRAU) ........................................ 51 TSYNCUL ......................................................... 44 SET BTS PKGBTSI........................ 73 PWRINCSS ....................... 109 R22 ............... 59 RXLEVMIN..... 92 SET BTS PKGBTST.................................................................................... 98 REMAL (PCMB) . 106 TSYNC (PKGBTST) ................................................................................................................................... 105 TIAS...... 39 RADIOMG.................... 30 REMAL (PCMS) ......... 114 TREL... 114 TRACERECTYP.................................................................................................................................... 76 RDLNKTO......................................................... 109 T23....................................... 71..................................................................................................................... 95 RETRY... 106 TSC................................................... 90 TGRANT ........................................ 25 SET BTS PKGBTSC ................................................................................. 71 TINHRUGR ................................................... 51 TGUARD......................... 24 SET BSC PKGBSCT ...............................................................................................................

......................... 110 VGRULF ...................... 75 UPTLEVU .......................... 50 TWCUSER.......................... 100 U W UPTLEVD ................................. 95 V X X121ADDR (CBCL) .2000 TTRAU......................................................................................................... 100 VOLUL ....................... 106 VOLDL ................................................................... 76 WMOD.................. TAC3 SBS ....................................... 75 UPTQUAD . 110 X121ADDR (OMAL) ...................................SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5...0 Version 30................................... 75 UPTQUAU ..................................................................................03......................................................................... 51 141 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann...........................................

2000 .SBS: BSC Database Parameter Description BR5. TAC3 SBS Version 30.0 142 / 142 Eckardt Bertermann.03.